You are on page 1of 325

SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Operation/Programming 08.2000 Edition

ShopMill

User Documentation
Overview of SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC Documentation (08.00)
General Documentation User Documentation

SINUMERIK
SIROTEC
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ 840D/840Di/ Accessories 840D/810D/ 840D/810D 840D/840Di/ 840D/810D/
FM-NC 810D/ FM-NC 810D/ FM-NC
FM-NC/611 FM-NC

Brochure Catalog Catalog AutoTurn Operator’s Guide Diagnostics Operator’s Guide


Ordering Info Accessories NC-Z – Short Guide – HT 6 Guide *) – Short Guide
NC 60.1 *) – Programming (1) – HPU – Operator’s
Technical Info. – Setup (2) – Unit Operator Guide *)
NC 60.2 Panel
User Documentation Manufacturer / Service Documentation

SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK


840D/840Di/ 840D/810D 840Di 840D/810D 840D/840Di/ 840D/810D
810D/ 810D
FM-NC

Program. Guide Operator’s Guide System Overview Description of Description of Descr. of Functions Configuring
– Short Guide – ManualTurn Functions Functions – Computer Link (HW) *)
– Fundamentals *) – Short Guide ManualTurn – ManualTurn Synchronized – Tool Data – FM-NC
– Advanced *) – ShopMill – ShopMill Actions Information – 810D
– Cycles – Short Guide ShopMill Wood, Glass, System – 840D
– Measuring Cycles Ceramics

Manufacturer / Service Documentation

SINUMERIK
SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK
840D/840Di/ 611D 840D/840Di/ 840D/810D/ 840D/810D/ 840D/810D 840D/810D/
810D/ 840D/810D 810D/ FM-NC FM-NC FM-NC
FM-NC FM-NC

Operator Description of Description of Configuring Kit Screen Kit Description of Description of


Components Functions Functions MMC 100/101 MMC 100/101 Functions Functions
(HW) *) Drive Functions *) – Basic Machine *) – Configuring SW Update Tool Manage- Operator
– Extended Functions Syntax and Configu- ment Interface OP 030
– Special Functions – Development Kit ration

Manufacturer / Service Documentation

SINUMERIK
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE
SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE SIMODRIVE SIMODRIVE SIMODRIVE SIROTEC
840D 840D/840Di/ 840D 840D
810D 611D 611D
FM-NC
611D

Description of Description of Installation & Lists *) Description of Description of EMC


Functions Functions Start-up Guide *) Functions Functions Guidelines
SINUMERIK Digitizing – FM-NC Linear Motor – Hydraulics
Safety Inte- – 810D Module
grated – 840D/611D – Analog Module
– MMC
Electronic Documentation Manufacturer / Service Documentation

SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK
840D/810D/
FM-NC 840D/810D 840Di
611,
Motors

DOC ON CD *)
The SINUMERIK System
Descr. of Functions Descr. of Functions Manual
ISO Dialects for CAM Integration (HW + Installation
*) These documents are a minimum requirement for the control SINUMERIK DNC NT-2000 and Start-up)
Introduction 1

Operation 2

SINUMERIK 840D/810D Programming with 3


ShopMill

ShopMill Programming with 4


G Code

Simulation 5
Operation/Programming

File Management 6

Alarms and Messages 7

Examples 8

Appendix A

Valid for

Control Software Version


SINUMERIK 810D/DE 3
SINUMERIK 840D/DE 5

08.00 Edition
Contents 08.00
0 0
SINUMERIK® Documentation

Printing history

Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.

The status of each edition is shown by the code in the "Remarks" column.

Status codes in the "Remarks" column:

A .... New documentation.


B .... Unrevised reprint with new order number.
C .... Revised edition with new status.

Edition Order No. Comment


10.97 6FC5298-2AD10-0BP0 A
11.98 6FC5298-2AD10-0BP1 C
03.99 6FC5298-5AD10-0BP0 C
08.00 6FC5298-5AD10-0BP1 C

This book forms part of the documentation available on CD ROM (DOCONCD)


Edition Order No. Comment
10.00 6FC5298-6CA00-0BG0 C

Trademarks
® ® ® ® ® ®
SIMATIC , SIMATIC HMI , SIMATIC NET , SIROTEC , SINUMERIK and SIMODRIVE are Siemens
trademarks. Other names in this publication might be trademarks whose use by a third party for his own
purposes may violate the rights of the registered holder.

Further information is available at the following Internet website: Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the
http://www.ad.siemens.de/sinumerik control. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions
with a new control or when servicing.

This publication was produced with WinWord V8.0 We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the hardware
and Designer V6.0. and software described. Nonetheless, differences might exist and we cannot
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not therefore guarantee that they are completely identical. The information contained
permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. in this document is, however, reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will
All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model be included in the next edition. We welcome suggestions for improvement.
or design, are reserved.

© Siemens AG 1997 – 2000. All rights reserved Subject to change without prior notice.

Order No. 6FC5298-5AD10-0BP1 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft


Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
08.00 Contents
0 0
Contents

Introduction 1-15
1.1 The ShopMill product................................................................................................... 1-16

1.2 Handling instructions ................................................................................................... 1-16

1.3 Operator components.................................................................................................. 1-17


1.3.1 OP 031 slimline operator panel ................................................................................... 1-17
1.3.2 OP 032S slimline operator panel................................................................................. 1-18
1.3.3 Important function keys ............................................................................................... 1-19

1.4 Control elements on the machine control panel .......................................................... 1-20


1.4.1 Emergency Stop .......................................................................................................... 1-20
1.4.2 Operating modes ......................................................................................................... 1-21
1.4.3 Machine functions........................................................................................................ 1-21
1.4.4 Feed control................................................................................................................. 1-22
1.4.5 Spindle control............................................................................................................. 1-23
1.4.6 Keyswitch..................................................................................................................... 1-24
1.4.7 Program control........................................................................................................... 1-25

1.5 Mini handheld unit ....................................................................................................... 1-26

1.6 Graphics interface ....................................................................................................... 1-28

1.7 Fundamentals.............................................................................................................. 1-29


1.7.1 Rectangular coordinate system ................................................................................... 1-29
1.7.2 Plane designations ...................................................................................................... 1-29
1.7.3 Polar coordinates......................................................................................................... 1-30
1.7.4 Absolute dimension ..................................................................................................... 1-30
1.7.5 Incremental dimension ................................................................................................ 1-31
1.7.6 Important softkeys for operation and programming .................................................... 1-31
1.7.7 Pocket calculator function ........................................................................................... 1-32
1.7.8 Inch/metric dimension system switchover ................................................................... 1-33
1.7.9 Switchover between machine and workpiece coordinate systems ............................. 1-34

Operation 2-35
2.1 Power ON and reference point approach.................................................................... 2-37

2.2 Manual mode and settings for manual mode .............................................................. 2-40
2.2.1 Traverse the machine axes ......................................................................................... 2-40
2.2.2 Load tool from list into spindle ..................................................................................... 2-41
2.2.3 Enter a new tool in the list and load it to the spindle.................................................... 2-42
2.2.4 Enter a new tool in the list and load it in the magazine................................................ 2-43
2.2.5 Start, stop and position the spindle manually .............................................................. 2-43
2.2.6 Machine-specific functions .......................................................................................... 2-45
2.2.7 Switch over machining plane/tool axis......................................................................... 2-45
2.2.8 Switch over to mm or inches ....................................................................................... 2-46

2.3 Set a new position value (basic offset) ........................................................................ 2-47

2.4 Set up workpiece ......................................................................................................... 2-48

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 0-5
Contents 08.00
0 0
2.4.1 Accept a zero offset from the zero offset list............................................................. 2-48
2.4.2 Manual setup with an edge probe ............................................................................. 2-49
2.4.3 Manual setup with a 3D probe .................................................................................. 2-50
2.4.4 Calibrate the workpiece probe .................................................................................. 2-54

2.5 Measuring tools in Manual area ................................................................................ 2-56


2.5.1 Accept tool from the tool list ...................................................................................... 2-56
2.5.2 Measuring tools using scratching method................................................................. 2-56
2.5.3 Measuring tools with a tool probe ............................................................................. 2-57
2.5.4 Calibrate the tool probe............................................................................................. 2-58

2.6 Machining in Manual mode ....................................................................................... 2-59


2.6.1 Change settings ........................................................................................................ 2-59
2.6.2 Positioning................................................................................................................. 2-59
2.6.3 Face milling ............................................................................................................... 2-60

2.7 MDA mode ................................................................................................................ 2-61

2.8 Automatic mode ........................................................................................................ 2-62


2.8.1 Switchover between "T, F, S", "G functions" and "Auxiliary functions" displays........ 2-63
2.8.2 Select a program for execution ................................................................................. 2-63
2.8.3 Start/stop/abort program ........................................................................................... 2-64
2.8.4 Interrupt program ...................................................................................................... 2-65
2.8.5 Enter a program at any selected point ...................................................................... 2-66
2.8.6 Program control......................................................................................................... 2-68
2.8.7 Simultaneous recording before machining................................................................ 2-70
2.8.8 Simultaneous recording during machining................................................................ 2-71

2.9 Execute a trial program run....................................................................................... 2-72


2.9.1 Single block ............................................................................................................... 2-72
2.9.2 Correct program ........................................................................................................ 2-73

2.10 Tools and tool offsets ................................................................................................ 2-74


2.10.1 Select the tool list ...................................................................................................... 2-76
2.10.2 Create a new tool ...................................................................................................... 2-77
2.10.3 Create tool offset block for tool edge1/2 ................................................................... 2-78
2.10.4 Change the tool name............................................................................................... 2-79
2.10.5 Create a replacement tool......................................................................................... 2-79
2.10.6 Manual tools .............................................................................................................. 2-79
2.10.7 Tool offsets ............................................................................................................... 2-80
2.10.8 Special tool functions ................................................................................................ 2-83
2.10.9 Create tool wear data................................................................................................ 2-84
2.10.10 Tool monitoring ......................................................................................................... 2-85
2.10.11 Magazine list ............................................................................................................. 2-86
2.10.12 Delete a tool .............................................................................................................. 2-87
2.10.13 Change the tool type ................................................................................................. 2-87
2.10.14 Load a tool ................................................................................................................ 2-87
2.10.15 Unload a tool ............................................................................................................. 2-88
2.10.16 Sort tools ................................................................................................................... 2-89

2.11 Zero offsets ............................................................................................................... 2-90


2.11.1 General ..................................................................................................................... 2-90

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


0-6 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Contents
0 0
2.11.2 Display a zero offset .................................................................................................... 2-91
2.11.3 Select/deselect settable zero offset in Manual area .................................................... 2-93

2.12 Switch to CNC operation ............................................................................................. 2-94

2.13 Remote diagnosis........................................................................................................ 2-94

Programming with ShopMill 3-95


3.1 Fundamental programming principles ......................................................................... 3-97

3.2 Program structure...................................................................................................... 3-100


3.2.1 Screen window in program ........................................................................................ 3-101
3.2.2 Toggle between screen windows .............................................................................. 3-102

3.3 Create a ShopMill program........................................................................................ 3-103


3.3.1 Create a new program; define a blank ...................................................................... 3-103
3.3.2 Program new blocks.................................................................................................. 3-106
3.3.3 Edit program blocks (change, delete, move, copy, paste) ........................................ 3-108

3.4 Program the tool, offset value and spindle speed ..................................................... 3-110

3.5 Contour milling........................................................................................................... 3-111


3.5.1 Free contour programming........................................................................................ 3-112
3.5.2 Description of softkeys for free contour programming function................................. 3-115
3.5.3 Description of parameters for line/circle contour elements ....................................... 3-117
3.5.4 Programming examples for freely defined contours.................................................. 3-118
3.5.5 Path milling of open and closed contours.................................................................. 3-120
3.5.6 Rough drilling in contour pockets .............................................................................. 3-123
3.5.7 Machine (rough cut) pocket with islands ................................................................... 3-126
3.5.8 Remove residual material.......................................................................................... 3-127
3.5.9 Finish pocket with islands.......................................................................................... 3-129

3.6 Programing simple path motions............................................................................... 3-131


3.6.1 Line............................................................................................................................ 3-131
3.6.2 Circle with known center point................................................................................... 3-133
3.6.3 Circle with known radius............................................................................................ 3-134
3.6.4 Helix........................................................................................................................... 3-135
3.6.5 Polar coordinates....................................................................................................... 3-136
3.6.6 Polar line.................................................................................................................... 3-137
3.6.7 Polar circle................................................................................................................. 3-138
3.6.8 Programming examples for polar coordinates .......................................................... 3-139

3.7 Drilling........................................................................................................................ 3-140


3.7.1 Centering ................................................................................................................... 3-141
3.7.2 Drilling and reaming................................................................................................... 3-142
3.7.3 Deep-hole drilling....................................................................................................... 3-143
3.7.4 Boring ........................................................................................................................ 3-145
3.7.5 Tapping...................................................................................................................... 3-146
3.7.6 Thread cutting............................................................................................................ 3-147
3.7.7 Position on freely programmable positions and position patterns ............................. 3-150
3.7.8 Freely programmable positions ................................................................................. 3-151
3.7.9 Line position pattern .................................................................................................. 3-152

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 0-7
Contents 08.00
0 0
3.7.10 Matrix position pattern ............................................................................................... 3-153
3.7.11 Full circle position pattern .......................................................................................... 3-154
3.7.12 Pitch circle position pattern........................................................................................ 3-156
3.7.13 Obstacle..................................................................................................................... 3-157
3.7.14 Repeat positions ........................................................................................................ 3-158
3.7.15 Programming examples for drilling ............................................................................ 3-159

3.8 Milling......................................................................................................................... 3-161


3.8.1 Face milling................................................................................................................ 3-161
3.8.2 Mill a rectangular pocket............................................................................................ 3-164
3.8.3 Mill a circular pocket .................................................................................................. 3-167
3.8.4 Mill rectangular spigots .............................................................................................. 3-169
3.8.5 Mill circular spigots .................................................................................................... 3-171
3.8.6 Mill longitudinal slots .................................................................................................. 3-173
3.8.7 Mill circumferential slots on a full or pitch circle......................................................... 3-175
3.8.8 Use of position patterns for milling ............................................................................ 3-177

3.9 Measurements ........................................................................................................... 3-180


3.9.1 Workpiece zero point................................................................................................. 3-180
3.9.2 Measure tool .............................................................................................................. 3-182

3.10 Miscellaneous functions............................................................................................. 3-183


3.10.1 Subroutines and program section repeats................................................................. 3-183
3.10.2 Alter the safety clearance or return plane.................................................................. 3-184
3.10.3 Zero offsets................................................................................................................ 3-185
3.10.4 Cylinder peripheral surface transformation................................................................ 3-191
3.10.5 Swiveling.................................................................................................................... 3-194
3.10.6 Define a new blank .................................................................................................... 3-199

3.11 Insert G code in a ShopMill program ......................................................................... 3-200

Programming with G Code 4-203


4.1 Create a G code program .......................................................................................... 4-204

4.2 R parameters (arithmetic parameters) ...................................................................... 4-207

4.3 User data ................................................................................................................... 4-208

4.4 ISO dialects ............................................................................................................... 4-211

Simulation 5-213
5.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 5-214

5.2 Start/abort program.................................................................................................... 5-214

5.3 Representation as a plan view................................................................................... 5-215

5.4 Representation as a 3-plane view ............................................................................. 5-216

5.5 Zoom a finished part viewport.................................................................................... 5-217

5.6 Three-dimensional representation of finished part .................................................... 5-218


5.6.1 Change position of finished part ................................................................................ 5-218
5.6.2 Cut open finished part................................................................................................ 5-219

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


0-8 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Contents
0 0
5.6.3 Update finished part display ...................................................................................... 5-219

File Management 6-221


6.1 Function..................................................................................................................... 6-222

6.2 Directory structure ..................................................................................................... 6-222

6.3 "Directory" operating area (MMC 100.2) ................................................................... 6-224


6.3.1 Select a file ................................................................................................................ 6-224
6.3.2 Create a file ............................................................................................................... 6-224
6.3.3 Execute a program .................................................................................................... 6-225
6.3.4 Copy/rename files...................................................................................................... 6-225
6.3.5 Delete files................................................................................................................. 6-225
6.3.6 Set up the V.24 interface ........................................................................................... 6-226
6.3.7 Execute a program via the V.24 ................................................................................ 6-227
6.3.8 Multiple clamping....................................................................................................... 6-228
6.3.9 Back up tool/zero point data ...................................................................................... 6-230
6.3.10 Read in tool/zero point data....................................................................................... 6-231
6.3.11 Read out files............................................................................................................. 6-232
6.3.12 Read in files............................................................................................................... 6-233
6.3.13 Error log..................................................................................................................... 6-233

6.4 "Directory" operating area (MMC 103) ...................................................................... 6-234


6.4.1 Basic display.............................................................................................................. 6-234
6.4.2 Create files/directories............................................................................................... 6-236
6.4.3 Open files/directories................................................................................................. 6-237
6.4.4 Load and unload programs ....................................................................................... 6-237
6.4.5 Select several programs............................................................................................ 6-239
6.4.6 Copy/rename/insert files/directories .......................................................................... 6-239
6.4.7 Delete/move files/directories ..................................................................................... 6-240
6.4.8 Execute from hard disk.............................................................................................. 6-240
6.4.9 Set up the V.24 interface ........................................................................................... 6-241
6.4.10 Multiple clamping....................................................................................................... 6-242
6.4.11 Back up tool/zero point data ...................................................................................... 6-244
6.4.12 Read in tool/zero point data....................................................................................... 6-245
6.4.13 Read out files............................................................................................................. 6-246
6.4.14 Read in files............................................................................................................... 6-246
6.4.15 Error log..................................................................................................................... 6-247

Alarms and Messages 7-249


7.1 Cycle alarms and messages ..................................................................................... 7-250
7.1.1 Error treatment in cycles............................................................................................ 7-250
7.1.2 Cycle alarm overview ................................................................................................ 7-250
7.1.3 Messages in cycles ................................................................................................... 7-254

7.2 Alarms for ShopMill ................................................................................................... 7-255


7.2.1 Alarm overview .......................................................................................................... 7-255
7.2.2 Select the alarm/message overview.......................................................................... 7-256
7.2.3 Description of alarms................................................................................................. 7-257

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 0-9
Contents 08.00
0 0

Examples 8-265
8.1 Ex. 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot ....................................... 8-266

8.2 Example 2: Shift and mirror a contour ....................................................................... 8-274

8.3 Example 3: Chamfer on circular spigot...................................................................... 8-277

8.4 Example 4: Cylinder surface transformation.............................................................. 8-280

8.5 Example 5: Slot side compensation .......................................................................... 8-283

8.6 Example 6: Swiveling................................................................................................. 8-287

Appendix A-295
A Abbreviations .............................................................................................................A-296

B Terms ........................................................................................................................A-299

C References ................................................................................................................A-307

D Index ..........................................................................................................................A-319

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


0-10 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Preface
0 Structure of the manual 0
Structure of the The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in 3 parts:
documentation • General Documentation
• User Documentation
• Manufacturer/Service Documentation

Target group This documentation is intended for use by operators of vertical


machining centers or universal milling machines controlled by the
SINUMERIK 810D/810D system.

Standard scope This Operating/Programming Guide describes the functionality of the


ShopMill operator interface. Extensions or changes made by the
machine tool manufacturer are documented by the machine tool
manufacturer.

For more detailed information on SINUMERIK 840D/810D publications


and other publications covering all SINUMERIK controls (e.g. universal
interface, measuring cycles...), please contact your local Siemens
office.

Other functions not described in this documentation might be


executable in the control. This does not, however, represent as
obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when
servicing.

Validity This Operating/Programming Guide applies to ShopMill systems with


• SINUMERIK 810D (SW 3 and later)
• SINUMERIK 840D (SW 5 and later)

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 0-11
Preface 08.00
0 Rules for proper use 0
The following symbols with special significance are used in the
documentation:

Notes The "Note" symbol is displayed in this document to draw your attention
to information relevant to the subject in hand.

In this documentation, you will find this symbol with a reference to an


ordering option. The function described is executable only if the control
contains the designated option.

Warnings The following warnings with varying degrees of severity are used in
this document.

Danger
This symbol appears whenever death, severe bodily injury or
substantial material damage will occur if the appropriate precautions
are not taken.

Caution
This symbol appears whenever minor bodily injury or material damage
can occur if the appropriate precautions are not taken.

Warning
This symbol appears whenever death, severe bodily injury or
substantial material damage can occur if the appropriate precautions
are not taken.

References This symbol appears whenever specific information can be found in


other literature.
A complete list of available literature is included in the Appendix of this
Operator’s Guide.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


0-12 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Preface
0 Rules for proper use 0

Principle Your SIEMENS 840D/810D with ShopMill has been designed and
constructed according to state-of-the-art technology and approved
safety regulations and standards.

Additional equipment SIEMENS offers special add-on equipment, products and system
configurations for the focused expansion of SIEMENS controls in your
field of application.

Personnel Only suitably trained, authorized, reliable personnel should be


allowed to handle the equipment. Persons who are not qualified
should never be allowed to work on the control, even for a short time.

The relevant responsibilities of personnel who set up, operate and


maintain the equipment must be clearly defined and adherence to
these responsibilities monitored.

Procedure Before the control is started up, it should be ensured that the
Operator’ Guides have been read and understood by the people
responsible. The operator also has a permanent obligation to
continuously monitor the overall technical condition (externally
recognizable defects and damage and changes in the operating
behavior) of the control.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 0-13
Preface 08.00
0 Rules for proper use 0

Servicing Repairs must be carried out by personnel who are specially trained
and qualified in the relevant technical subject according to the
information supplied in the service and maintenance guide. All
appropriate safety specifications must be observed.

The following is deemed to be improper usage and exempts the


manufacturer from any liability:

Any application deviating from the above points or usage extending


beyond the given limits.

Cases where the control is not maintained in perfect technical


condition, or is operated without due regard to safety or danger, and
cases where any or all of the instructions in the Operator’s Guide have
not been observed.

If faults that might affect the safety of the equipment are not rectified
before the control is started up.

Any modification, bypassing or disabling of items of equipment on


the control that are required to ensure fault-free operation, unlimited
use and active and passive safety.

Improper usage gives rise to unforeseen dangers to


• life and limb of personnel,
• the control, machine or other assets of the owner and the user.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


0-14 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Introduction
1 1

Introduction

1.1 The ShopMill product ................................................................................................ 1-16

1.2 Handling instructions................................................................................................. 1-16

1.3 Operator components ............................................................................................... 1-17


1.3.1 OP 031 slimline operator panel................................................................................. 1-17
1.3.2 OP 032S slimline operator panel .............................................................................. 1-18
1.3.3 Important function keys............................................................................................. 1-19

1.4 Control elements on the machine control panel ....................................................... 1-20


1.4.1 Emergency Stop ....................................................................................................... 1-20
1.4.2 Operating modes ...................................................................................................... 1-21
1.4.3 Machine functions ..................................................................................................... 1-21
1.4.4 Feed control .............................................................................................................. 1-22
1.4.5 Spindle control .......................................................................................................... 1-23
1.4.6 Keyswitch .................................................................................................................. 1-24
1.4.7 Program control ........................................................................................................ 1-25

1.5 Mini handheld unit..................................................................................................... 1-26

1.6 Graphics interface..................................................................................................... 1-28

1.7 Fundamentals ........................................................................................................... 1-29


1.7.1 Rectangular coordinate system ................................................................................ 1-29
1.7.2 Plane designations.................................................................................................... 1-29
1.7.3 Polar coordinates ...................................................................................................... 1-30
1.7.4 Absolute dimension................................................................................................... 1-30
1.7.5 Incremental dimension.............................................................................................. 1-31
1.7.6 Important softkeys for operation and programming.................................................. 1-31
1.7.7 Pocket calculator function......................................................................................... 1-32
1.7.8 Inch/metric dimension system switchover ................................................................ 1-33
1.7.9 Switchover between machine and workpiece coordinate systems........................... 1-34

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 1-15
Introduction 08.00
1 1.1 The ShopMill product 1

1.1 The ShopMill product


The ShopMill operating and programming software has been designed
to perform 2½D milling operations on vertical and universal milling
machinery with a maximum of 5 axes (including 2 rotary axes) and 1
spindle.
The recommended hardware base for ShopMill is a SINUMERIK
840D/810D control system with MMC100.2 and MMC103.
ShopMill has been designed such that machine users can learn
quickly and easily how to operate and program the SINUMERIK
840D/810D CNC control system. The standard operator interface
provides access to the full functional scope of the SINUMERIK
840D/810D. Workpieces are programmed graphically, i.e. the user
does not need to have G code programming expertise.

Highlights • Dynamic input graphics (programming graphics) for contour


elements and cycles
• Realtime simulation with zoom feature (online or in dry run mode)
• Contour pocket cycles with automatic residual material sensing
(option)
• 3D graphics of finished-part contour
• Optimum adjustment of tool traversing paths taking account of
workpiece contour and obstacles
• Powerful contour computer for entry of freely defined contours
• Measuring cycles for measuring tools and workpieces

1.2 Handling instructions


Caution
The operator panel/machine control panel may be opened only for
servicing purposes by appropriately trained personnel.

Danger
When the operator panel/machine control panel is opened with the
power supply still connected, live parts are exposed which pose an
extreme risk to the health and safety of operating personnel!

Warning
Failure to handle the electronic components inside the
operator/machine control panel correctly (in accordance with ESD
guidelines) may cause them irreparable damage.

Before actuating any of the control elements on this panel:


Please read all the relevant explanations in this document carefully!

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


1-16 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Introduction
1 1.3 Operator components 1
1.3 Operator components

1.3.1 OP 031 slimline operator panel

OP 031 slimline operator


panel with machine
control panel A B C D E
(
B 7 8 9 /
F G H I J
4 5 6 * )
K L M N- O
1 2 3 [
P Q R S T
= 0 . + ]
U V W X Y
\ , 1..n

A Z ? ! –

. < > "

$
End

1 2 3 4 5 6

AD

A Graphics monitor, color


B Alphanumeric keypad
C Correction/cursor keypad with control keys and input key
D Machine control panel

1 Main menu key "Machine Manual"


2 Recall
3 Softkey menu (horizontal)
4 ETC key (menu extension)
5 Area switchover key
6 Softkey menu (vertical)

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 1-17
Introduction 08.00
1 1.3 Operator components 1
1.3.2 OP 032S slimline operator panel

Slimline operator panel


OP 032S

with CNC keyboard


(QWERTY)
including keys "Program",
"Program Manager", "Tool
Offset", "Alarm" from the
substitute key set
(US layout)
Program

Program Tool
Alarm
Manager Offset

and machine control


panel Manuell
100%
with keys "Manual" and
"Auto" from the substitute • Klicken Sie, um Text
key set (US layout) hinzuzufügen
Auto

Example of key assignments on an OP032S slimline operator panel

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


1-18 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Introduction
1 1.3 Operator components 1
1.3.3 Important function keys

"Information" key
You can use this key to
• display or conceal a programming help window, e.g. containing a
help graphic
• toggle between two different screen displays when writing
programs
(see Section "Screen window in program")

"Main Menu" key


You can call the ShopMill main menu with this key:
Machine Machine Program Program Messages Tools CNC ISO
Manual Auto Manager Alarms Zero

"Machine" operating area key


M You can call the "Machine" main menu with this key.

Toggle key
If a parameter has several different setting options, you can toggle
between them with the Toggle key. It has the same function as the
"Alternative" key.

Home key
This key moves the cursor
• to the first parameter setting field in an input form
• to the first block (program header) in a machining plan

End key
End
This key moves the cursor
• to the last parameter setting field in an input form
• to the last block (program end) in a machining plan

Edit key
Press this key
• to switch the parameter setting field to Insert mode
• to activate pocket calculator mode

ETC key
> This key calls the extended program editor (see Chapter
"Programming").

Delete-Taste (OP 032S only)


Del
This deletes the value in a parameter field, leaving the field empty.

Backspace key
This key performs the same function as the Delete key.

C trl Ctrl-Taste (OP 032S only)


Using key combination Ctrl + Pos1 or Ctrl + End, you can jump to the
program beginning or program end respectively in the machining plan
and G code editor.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 1-19
Introduction 08.00
1 1.4 Control elements on the machine control panel 1

Operating area keys When you press one of the following operating area keys, the
OP 032S corresponding area will be displayed; all other operating areas and
functions will be deselected at the same time.

Press this key to display the "Messages – Alarms" operating area. It is


Alarm

equivalent in function to the "Messages – Alarms" softkey.

Program
Press this key to display the "Program" operating area. It is equivalent
in function to the "Program" softkey.

Tool
Press this key to display the "Tools" operating area. It is equivalent in
Offset
function to the "Tools Zero" softkey. You can access the operating
area by pressing softkey "Zero offset".

Program
Press this key to display the "Directory" operating area. It is equivalent
Manager
in function to the "Program Manager" softkey.

1.4 Control elements on the machine control panel

Operations on the machine tool such as axis traversal or "Start


program" can only be initiated via a machine control panel.

A SIEMENS machine control panel or a machine control panel


supplied by the machine tool manufacturer can be connected to the
machine tool.

1.4.1 Emergency Stop

Emergency Stop button


Press the red pushbutton in emergency situations:
1. If human life is at risk
2. If there is a risk of damage to the machine tool or workpiece.
Generally speaking, an Emergency Stop initiates a controlled stop of
all drives with the greatest possible braking torque.

Further or different reactions to Emergency Stop:


See information provided by machine tool manufacturer!

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


1-20 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Introduction
1 1.4 Control elements on the machine control panel 1

1.4.2 Operating modes

The appropriate mode LED lights up to signal and confirm which


operating mode is active.

M a n ua l
Machine Manual
Machine Jog mode implemented by
• continuous movement of axes via direction keys,
• incremental movement of axes via direction keys or
• the handwheel.

This key has the same function as the "Machine Manual" softkey.

Au to
Machine Auto
Control of the machine through automatic execution of programs.

This key has the same function as the "Machine Auto" softkey.

1.4.3 Machine functions

M a n ua l
Repos
Repositioning, re-approach contour in "Machine Manual" mode

M a n ua l
Ref
Approach reference point in "Machine Manual" mode

Inc keys
Inc functions are activated in conjunction with "Machine Manual"
mode:

Inc Var (Incremental Feed variable)


Incremental mode with variable increment size (see Section
"Traversing machine axes").

Inc (Incremental Feed)


... Incremental mode with predefined increment size of
1, ..., 10000 increments.

The increment value is evaluated as a function of a machine data.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 1-21
Introduction 08.00
1 1.4 Control elements on the machine control panel 1
1.4.4 Feed control

Feedrate/rapid traverse override


Control range:
0% to 120% of programmable feedrate.
100% of programmable feedrate is not exceeded in rapid traverse.

Feed Stop
When you press the "Feed Stop" key:
• Execution of the active program is halted
• The axis drives are shut down in a controlled manner
• The associated LED lights up as soon as the control accepts the
"Feed Stop" command
• FST (=Feed Stop) is displayed in the header area (channel status
display)

Feed Start
When you press the "Feed Start" key:
• The program is continued at the interruption block
• The feedrate is accelerated up to the programmed value
• The associated LED lights up as soon as the control accepts the
"Feed Start" command

Axis keys
These select the axis (X, Y, Z, 4 or 5) for traversal,
X 5
...
in the positive direction with the "+" key or
in the negative direction with the "–" key.

Rapid traverse override


The axis travels in rapid traverse when you press this key together
with one of the direction keys displayed above.

MCS/WCS
This key toggles between the machine coordinate system and the tool
coordinate system.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


1-22 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Introduction
1 1.4 Control elements on the machine control panel 1

1.4.5 Spindle control

Spindle override (spindle speed override switch)

• The rotary selector switch with scale markings allows you to lower
or raise the programmed spindle speed S (equals 100%).
• The set spindle speed value S is displayed as an absolute value
and a percentage in the "Spindles" screen display.

Control range:
50% to 120% of programmed spindle speed

Alternative to
rotary selector switch Press the key

• "Spindle –" or "Spindle +" and lower or raise the programmed


spindle speed "S" (equals 100%).

• "100%" and the programmed spindle speed is set.


100%

Spindle Stop
When you press the "Spindle Stop" key:
• The spindle speed is reduced to zero
• The associated LED lights up as soon as "Spindle Stop" is
accepted by the control.
Example application:
• When you need to change a tool
• When you wish to enter spindle and machine functions during
setting up.

Spindle Start
When you press the "Spindle Start" key:
• The spindle speed is accelerated up to the programmed value
The associated LED lights up as soon as the control accepts the
"Spindle Start" command

Alternative to Spindle Start

The spindle is rotating CCW or CW and is started.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 1-23
Introduction 08.00
1 1.4 Control elements on the machine control panel 1

1.4.6 Keyswitch

The keyswitch on the SINUMERIK 840D/810D has 4 settings to which


protection levels 4 to 7 are assigned.
The machine manufacturer or end user can allocate functions to the
keyswitch settings. Operator panel machine data can also be
configured to set access to programs, data and functions in
accordance with user requirements.
The keyswitch has three keys of different colors which can be
removed in the specified positions:

Key positions
Position 0 Lowest access
No key authorization
Protection level 7 



Position 1 


Key 1 black 

Protection level 6 Increasing
access authorization
Position 2 

Key 1 green 

Protection level 5 




Position 3
Highest
Key 1 red
access authorization
Protection level 4

Changing the access Changing the access authorization (e.g. by selecting a new keyswitch
authorization position) does not cause the currently selected display to be rebuilt
automatically, but only when the next display is selected (e.g. when a
directory is closed and opened).
When you execute a function, the currently valid access rights are
checked.

If the PLC is in the Stop state, the input image of the machine control
panel is not scanned. The keyswitch positions are not therefore
evaluated during power-up.

Passwords To set access authorization levels, there is the additional option of


entering three passwords in the "Start-up" area of the standard
operator interface.
The keyswitch positions are irrelevant when a password is set.

Please read the information provided by the machine manufacturer.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


1-24 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Introduction
1 1.4 Control elements on the machine control panel 1
1.4.7 Program control

NC Start
When you press the "NC Start" key, the selected part program (whose
program name is displayed in the header) is started at the current
block. The associated LED lights up.

NC Stop
When you press the "NC Stop" key, the active part program is halted
and the associated LED lights up.
You can restart the program by selecting NC Start again.

Single block
This function offers you the option of executing a program block by
block. You can activate the "Single block" function in "Machine Auto"
mode. When single block mode is active, the associated LED on the
machine control panel lights up (see Section "Operation, single
block").

Reset (Reset)

When you press the "Reset" key:


• Execution of the currently selected program is aborted.
• Messages from the monitoring function are erased (except for
alarms associated with POWER ON, NC Start and Acknowledge
Alarm).
• The channel is switched to the "Reset" state, i.e.
− the NC remains synchronized with the machine
− the control system is in the initial setting and ready for the next
program run.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 1-25
Introduction 08.00
1 1.5 Mini handheld unit 1
1.5 Mini handheld unit

20 60 108

F
E
H
216

D
B

88 I C 83,5

A Emergency Stop button, two-channel


B Enabling key, two-channel
C Axis selector switch for 5 axes and neutral position
D Function keys F1, F2, F3
E Traversing keys, directions +, –
F Rapid traverse key for high-speed travel with traversing keys or
handwheel
G Handwheel
H Magnets for attachment to metal parts
I 1.5 m ... 3.5 m connecting lead

Control elements Emergency Stop button


Use the Emergency Stop button in urgent situations, i.e.
1. when human life is at risk or
2. if there is a risk of damage to the machine tool or workpiece.

Enabling key
The enabling key has 2 settings. It must be pressed to initiate
traversing movements.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


1-26 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Introduction
1 1.5 Mini handheld unit 1
Axis selector switch
You can select up to 5 axes with the axis selector switch.

Function keys
You can activate machine-specific functions with the function keys.

Traversing keys
The + and – traversing keys can be pressed to move the axis selected
with the axis selector switch.

Handwheel
The handwheel can be used to move the axis selected with the axis
selector switch. The handwheel supplies 2 track signals with 100 l/V.

Rapid traverse key


The rapid traverse key increases the traversing speed of the axis
selected with the axis selector switch. The rapid traverse key acts both
on travel commands from the +/– keys and on the handwheel signals.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 1-27
Introduction 08.00
1 1.6 Graphics interface 1

1.6 Graphics interface

Screen layout
1 2
5 4
6 3

8
7

9 13

10

11
12

Explanation of display 1 Operating modes: Machine Auto/Machine Manual


elements Operating areas: Program/Directory/Messages/Tools
2 Alarm and message line
3 Program name
4 Reserved
5 Channel status
6 Program status
7 Position display for max. 5 axes
8 Status display for
• Tool
• Feed
• Spindle
9 Status display, e.g. symbols denoting rotation
10 Working window
• Section from the selection program
• Input area for various functions
11 Dialog line in which additional explanations (Help) can be called
12 Horizontal softkey menu with eight softkey functions
13 Vertical softkey menu with eight softkey functions

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


1-28 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Introduction
1 1.7 Fundamentals 1

1.7 Fundamentals

1.7.1 Rectangular coordinate system

The principle of machining workpieces on a mill is based on a


rectangular coordinate system consisting of three coordinate axes – X,
Y and Z – which are parallel to the machine axes.

The orientation of the coordinate system in relation to the machine is


dependent on the machine type. The axis directions are governed by
the so-called "Right-hand rule" (according to DIN 66217).

Imagine you are standing in front of the machine with the middle finger
on your right hand pointing in the infeed direction of the main spindle.

• Your thumb is then pointing in direction +X,


• your index finger in direction +Y and
• your middle finger in direction +Z.

Z Y
+Z

+Y

+X
X

Machine coordinate system and "Right-hand rule"

1.7.2 Plane designations

Each plane is defined by two coordinate axes. The third coordinate


axis (tool axis) in each case is perpendicular to this plane and
determines the infeed direction of the tool (e.g. for 2½ D milling
operations).

When you program a workpiece,


Z
you must specify the plane in Y

which you are working so that Y/Z


the control can calculate the tool Z/X
offset values correctly. The plane
is also significant for certain X/
types of circle programming and Y
for polar coordinates.
X

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 1-29
Introduction 08.00
1 1.7 Fundamentals 1
Working planes are defined as follows:

Plane Tool axis


X/Y Z
Z/X Y
Y/Z X

1.7.3 Polar coordinates

The rectangular coordinate system is suitable in cases where


dimensions in the production drawing are orthogonal. For workpieces
dimensioned with arcs or angles, it is better to define positions using
polar coordinates.

Polar coordinates have their zero point in the "pole".

Example: Y
Using this system, points P1 and
P2
P2 could be defined as follows in P1
relation to the pole:

60
P1:Radius =100 plus angle =30°
75° 0
10 30°
P2:Radius =60 plus angle =75°
Pole
30

X
15

1.7.4 Absolute dimension

With an absolute dimension, all position data always refer to the


currently valid zero point. With respect to tool motion, this means:

The absolute dimension describes the


position to which the tool must move.

Example: Y
The positions for points P1 to P3
as absolute dimensions are as P2
follows in relation to the zero
point: P1
P1: X20 Y35
60

P3
P2: X50 Y60
35
20

P3: X70 Y20 X


20
50
70

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


1-30 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Introduction
1 1.7 Fundamentals 1

1.7.5 Incremental dimension

In the case of production drawings in which dimensions refer to some


other point on the workpiece rather than the zero point, it is possible to
enter an incremental dimension.

With an incremental dimension input, a position specification refers in


each case to a point programmed beforehand.

Example:
Y
The positions for points P1 to P3
as incremental dimensions are as
P2
follows:
P1: X20 Y35 ;(in relation to the

20
P1
zero point)

15
P2: X30 Y20 ;(in relation to P1) P3

20
P3: X20 Y-35 ;(in relation to P2) X

20 30 20

1.7.6 Important softkeys for operation and programming

"Cancel" softkey
Returns to next-higher menu. When you press "Cancel", a window is
closed without your inputs being stored.

"Back" softkey
Returns to next-higher menu.

"Alternat." softkey
This softkey is displayed when the cursor is positioned on a parameter
setting field for which one of several settings can be selected.

"OK" softkey
Parameter settings you have entered are accepted and stored.

"Accept" softkey
Parameters you have entered are transferred to the program and
stored. The softkey will not be displayed if you have made a
parameterization error.

Tools "Tools" softkey


You can select the "Tools" softkey (in vertical softkey menu) in any
input screenform with a tool input field in order to change to the tool list
in the "Tools" operating mode.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 1-31
Introduction 08.00
1 1.7 Fundamentals 1

Zero "Zero offset" softkey


offset You can select the "Zero offset" softkey (in vertical softkey menu) from
any screenform with a zero offset selection field in order to call the
zero offsets list.

To "To program" softkey


program You can return to the input screenform by selecting the "To program"
softkey.

1.7.7 Pocket calculator function

Function

Precondition The cursor is positioned on a parameter field.

Press the Edit key (MMC 100.2)

or
= Equals key (MMC 103, and MMC 100.2 with SW 5 and later)
to activate pocket calculator mode.
To perform an arithmetic function on two values, press this key and
then enter the symbol for the relevant function (+, –, *, / ) followed by a
value.
Then press the Input key and the second value to perform the
calculation.

Example application:
A tool wear value in length L of + 0.1 must be included in a tool
calculation.

• Place the cursor in the appropriate parameter setting field,


• press the Equals key to open the parameter field and
• add the new wear value to the existing value,
e.g. 0.5 + 0.1
• Terminate calculation by pressing the Input key.
Result: 0.6

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


1-32 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Introduction
1 1.7 Fundamentals 1

1.7.8 Inch/metric dimension system switchover

Function

This function enables you to switch between the metric and inch
dimension systems depending on the dimension units used in your
production drawing.

Every dimension system switchover applies to the entire machine, i.e.


all relevant measurement data are automatically converted to the new
dimension system, e.g.

• Positions
• Tool offsets
• Zero offsets

Operating sequence

Machine Change to the "Machine Manual" mode.


Manual

Settings Press softkeys "Settings" and "Inch"

Inch • Switch from metric to inches: Softkey is active

Inch • Switch from inches to metric: Softkey is not active

When you press the "Inch" softkey, a prompt box appears asking you
to confirm the switchover operation.

The dimension system is adjusted correspondingly when you confirm


with the "OK" softkey.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 1-33
Introduction 08.00
1 1.7 Fundamentals 1

1.7.9 Switchover between machine and workpiece coordinate systems

Function

The machine coordinate system (MCS) is the original system of your


machine. In contrast to the workpiece coordinate system (WCS), it
does not allow for tool offsets, zero offset, scalings, etc.

Operating sequence

You can switch between the machine and workpiece coordinate


systems by following the sequence below:
Press the key on the machine control panel

or

Machine Machine select softkey "Actual value MCS" in the "Machine Manual" or
Manual Auto
"Machine Auto" operating areas.
Actual value • Switch from WCS to MCS: Softkey is active.
MCS

Actual • Switch from MCS to WCS: Softkey is not active.


value MCS

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


1-34 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2

Operation

2.1 Power ON and reference point approach ................................................................. 2-37

2.2 Manual mode and settings for manual mode ........................................................... 2-40
2.2.1 Traverse the machine axes ...................................................................................... 2-40
2.2.2 Load tool from list into spindle .................................................................................. 2-41
2.2.3 Enter a new tool in the list and load it to the spindle ................................................. 2-42
2.2.4 Enter a new tool in the list and load it in the magazine ............................................. 2-43
2.2.5 Start, stop and position the spindle manually ........................................................... 2-43
2.2.6 Machine-specific functions........................................................................................ 2-45
2.2.7 Switch over machining plane/tool axis ...................................................................... 2-45
2.2.8 Switch over to mm or inches..................................................................................... 2-46

2.3 Set a new position value (basic offset) ..................................................................... 2-47

2.4 Set up workpiece ...................................................................................................... 2-48


2.4.1 Accept a zero offset from the zero offset list ............................................................ 2-48
2.4.2 Manual setup with an edge probe............................................................................. 2-49
2.4.3 Manual setup with a 3D probe .................................................................................. 2-50
2.4.4 Calibrate the workpiece probe .................................................................................. 2-54

2.5 Measuring tools in Manual area................................................................................ 2-56


2.5.1 Accept tool from the tool list...................................................................................... 2-56
2.5.2 Measuring tools using scratching method ................................................................ 2-56
2.5.3 Measuring tools with a tool probe ............................................................................. 2-57
2.5.4 Calibrate the tool probe............................................................................................. 2-58

2.6 Machining in Manual mode ....................................................................................... 2-59


2.6.1 Change settings ........................................................................................................ 2-59
2.6.2 Positioning ................................................................................................................ 2-59
2.6.3 Face milling............................................................................................................... 2-60

2.7 MDA mode ................................................................................................................ 2-61

2.8 Automatic mode........................................................................................................ 2-62


2.8.1 Switchover between "T, F, S", "G functions" and "Auxiliary functions" displays ....... 2-63
2.8.2 Select a program for execution................................................................................. 2-63
2.8.3 Start/stop/abort program ........................................................................................... 2-64
2.8.4 Interrupt program ...................................................................................................... 2-65
2.8.5 Enter a program at any selected point ...................................................................... 2-66
2.8.6 Program control ........................................................................................................ 2-68
2.8.7 Simultaneous recording before machining ............................................................... 2-70
2.8.8 Simultaneous recording during machining................................................................ 2-71

2.9 Execute a trial program run ...................................................................................... 2-72


2.9.1 Single block............................................................................................................... 2-72
2.9.2 Correct program........................................................................................................ 2-73

2.10 Tools and tool offsets................................................................................................ 2-74


2.10.1 Select the tool list...................................................................................................... 2-76
2.10.2 Create a new tool...................................................................................................... 2-77

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-35
Operation 08.00
2 2
2.10.3 Create tool offset block for tool edge1/2 ................................................................... 2-78
2.10.4 Change the tool name............................................................................................... 2-79
2.10.5 Create a replacement tool......................................................................................... 2-79
2.10.6 Manual tools .............................................................................................................. 2-79
2.10.7 Tool offsets ............................................................................................................... 2-80
2.10.8 Special tool functions ................................................................................................ 2-83
2.10.9 Create tool wear data................................................................................................ 2-84
2.10.10 Tool monitoring ......................................................................................................... 2-85
2.10.11 Magazine list ............................................................................................................. 2-86
2.10.12 Delete a tool .............................................................................................................. 2-87
2.10.13 Change the tool type ................................................................................................. 2-87
2.10.14 Load a tool ................................................................................................................ 2-87
2.10.15 Unload a tool ............................................................................................................. 2-88
2.10.16 Sort tools ................................................................................................................... 2-89

2.11 Zero offsets ............................................................................................................... 2-90


2.11.1 General ..................................................................................................................... 2-90
2.11.2 Display a zero offset.................................................................................................. 2-91
2.11.3 Select/deselect settable zero offset in Manual area.................................................. 2-93

2.12 Switch to CNC operation........................................................................................... 2-94

2.13 Remote diagnosis ..................................................................................................... 2-94

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-36 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.1 Power ON and reference point approach 2

2.1 Power ON and reference point approach

Switching control system


ON and OFF
Function

Power ON A variety of methods can be employed to switch on the power supply


to the control system or to the whole plant.

Please therefore read the information provided by the machine


manufacturer!
After power ON, the main "Machine Manual" display appears on the
screen

Main "Machine Manual" display

Power OFF For details on how to switch off the power supply to the control system
or the whole plant:

Please read the information provided by the machine manufacturer!

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-37
Operation 08.00
2 2.1 Power ON and reference point approach 2

Reference point
approach
Function

The "Ref" function is used to synchronize the control system and


machine after power ON.
Various reference point approach methods may be employed.
Please read the information provided by the machine manufacturer!

• The reference point can be applied only with respect to machine


axes. The actual value display after power ON does not coincide
with the actual position of the axes.
• A reference point must be approached in cases where there is no
absolute measuring system installed on the machine!

Caution

If the axes are not positioned safely, then you must reposition them
accordingly.
When doing so, please pay careful attention to the axis motions
directly on the machine!
Ignore the actual value display until the axes have been referenced!
Software limit switches are not operative!

Operating sequence

Operating mode "Machine Manual" is selected.

Select machine function "Ref" .

Select the axis that you wish to move and


X ...

then press the "+" or "–" key.

Your selected axis moves to the reference point. The direction or


sequence is defined by the PLC program supplied by the machine
manufacturer.
If you have pressed the wrong direction key, the input will not be
accepted and the axis does not move.
The display now shows the reference point value.

No symbol is displayed for axes which are not yet referenced.

This symbol is displayed next to the axis when it has reached


the reference point.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-38 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.1 Power ON and reference point approach 2
You can stop the axis you have started before it reaches the reference
point.

Select the axis that you wish to move and


X ...

then press the "+" or "–" key.


Your selected axis moves to the reference point.

Caution

The machine is synchronized with the control once the axes have
been referenced. The actual value display is set to the reference point
value. It shows the difference between the machine zero and the slide
reference point. From this moment onwards, path limitations such as
software limit switches are operative.

End the function via the machine control panel by selecting operating
mode "Machine Auto" or "Machine Manual".

• You can reference all axes simultaneously (depending on the PLC


program supplied by the machine tool manufacturer).
• The feedrate override is operative.

Further notes

The machine tool manufacturer may specify the sequence in which


axes must be referenced.

Only when all axes with a defined reference point have reached this
point will you be able to activate NC Start in "Machine Auto".

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-39
Operation 08.00
2 2.2 Manual mode and settings for manual mode 2

2.2 Manual mode and settings for manual mode

2.2.1 Traverse the machine axes

Function

You can perform the following tasks in Manual mode:


1. Synchronize the control system with the machine (reference point
approach).
2. Set up the machine, i.e. activate manually controlled motions on
the machine using the keys and handwheels provided on the
machine control panel.
3. Activate manually controlled motions on the machine using the
keys and handwheels provided on the machine control panel while
a part program is interrupted.

Traverse axes by keys


Operating sequence

By pressing the increment keys, you can move the selected axis in
defined increments in the appropriate direction every time you press
an "Axis key" in manual mode.
The axes themselves traverse at the programmed setup feedrate.
Preset increments

• You can select preset increments by pressing keys


... [1], [10], ..., [10000]

• You can also define variable increments in the "Settings" menu:

Select with softkey Settings

Enter the increment of your choice in parameter "Variable


increment".

Using the "Inc Var" key, move the selected axis by the preset
increment with the "Axis key" in Manual mode.

Example: With an increment of 0.5 mm, set a variable


increment of 500.

Set setup feedrate The "Setup feedrate" parameter is also entered in the "Settings"
menu. The setting in this parameter defines the feedrate (in mm/min)
at which axes must traverse in setup mode.
A limitation for the maximum feed velocity is programmed in a
machine data.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-40 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.2 Manual mode and settings for manual mode 2
Select the axis that you wish to move and
X ...
then press the "+" or "–" key.

The feedrate and rapid traverse override switches may be operative.

Depending on the PLC program, you may be able to select more than
one axis at a time.

Further notes

• After the control power supply has been switched on, it may be
possible to move axes into the limit zone of the machine as they
have not yet been referenced. They may trigger emergency limit
switches in this zone.
• The software limit switches and working area limitation are not yet
operative!
• The feed enable signal must be set.

Traverse axes by means


of handwheels
Please note the machine manufacturer's instruction manual with
regard to the selection and mode of operation of handwheels.

2.2.2 Load tool from list into spindle

Operating sequence

Select with softkey Machine T, S, M, ...


Manual

The cursor is positioned on the input field of tool parameter "T":

Tools Call the tool list via the softkey


zero pt.

or
Tool key
Offset

Select the tool of your choice in the tool list and

Back to confirm your selection.


manual

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-41
Operation 08.00
2 2.2 Manual mode and settings for manual mode 2
The tool is accepted.
You can select a cutting edge
D1/D2.

When you press the "NC Start"


key, the tool is loaded into the
spindle.

2.2.3 Enter a new tool in the list and load it to the spindle

Operating sequence

Prepare for loading

Machine T, S, M, ... Go into the "Machine Manual" area and select function "T, S, M, ...".
Manual
The cursor is positioned on the input field of tool parameter "T":

Enter tool in tool list

Tool Call the tool list by selecting key "Tool Offset" or softkey "Tools".
Offset Tools
or
Select a free tool in the tool list and enter a new tool (as described in
Section "Tools and tool offsets").

Back to Select the "Back to manual" softkey to return automatically to the


manual
"T,S,M,..." function. The tool name is now entered in the input field of
tool parameter "T".

Execute tool change


operation

The tool change is enabled when you press "NC Start".

The loaded tool is marked by a spindle symbol in the tool list.

Now load the tool manually into the spindle as described in the
machine manufacturer’s instruction manual.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-42 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.2 Manual mode and settings for manual mode 2

2.2.4 Enter a new tool in the list and load it in the magazine

Operating sequence

Enter tool in tool list

Tool Call the tool list by selecting the "Tool Offset" key
Offset

Tool or select softkey "Tool list".


list

Select a free tool in the tool list and enter a new tool (as described in
Section "Tools and tool offsets").

New Select softkey "New tool".


tool

Cutter 3D Select the tool type of your choice and enter a tool name. Enter the
... probe tool offsets if applicable.

Load tool to magazine

Tool Load If the magazine on your machine has variable location assignment,
list
execute the "Load" function in the "Tool list" menu.

If it is a magazine with fixed location assignment, load the tool in the


required magazine location as described in the machine
manufacturer’s instruction manual.

2.2.5 Start, stop and position the spindle manually

Operating sequence

Set the spindle speed

Machine T, S, M, ... Select the menu "T, S, M, ..." in the "Machine Manual" operating
Manual
mode.
Enter the speed setting of your choice in the spindle speed input field.

Press the "NC Start" key.

If the spindle is already rotating, it will accelerate/decelerate to the new


speed setting. If the spindle is stationary, the value is stored as the
setpoint speed. The spindle remains stationary.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-43
Operation 08.00
2 2.2 Manual mode and settings for manual mode 2

Start/stop the spindle

The "Spindle CCW" or "Spindle CW" keys start the spindle rotating at
the preset spindle speed and the currently valid spindle override
weighting.

You can stop the spindle again by pressing the "Spindle Stop" key.

Alternative method

Machine T, S, M, ... You can also select Start/Stop Spindle in the "Spindle" selection field
Manual
in menu "T, S, M,...".

Clockwise spindle rotation:


CCW spindle rotation:
Spindle Stop:

and then execute by pressing "NC Start".

Position spindle You can use this function to position the spindle at a specific angle,
e.g. during a tool change.
• A stationary spindle is positioned via the shortest possible route.
• A rotating spindle is positioned as it continues to turn in the same
direction.
Spindle positions are specified in degrees.

Machine T, S, M, ... Select the menu "T, S, M, ..." in the "Machine Manual" operating
Manual
mode.

Select the symbol for spindle


position in the "Spindle" selection
field. The "Stop Pos." input field is
displayed in which you must enter
a spindle stop position.

The spindle is turned to the selected position when you press


"NC Start".

Change the spindle speed

The spindle override switch can be used to set spindle speed S to


between 50 and 120% of the last speed setting.

Or you can use the following keys on the OP032S operator panel:

You can reduce or increase programmed spindle speed "S"


(corresponds to 100%) using the "Spindle –" or "Spindle +" keys.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-44 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.2 Manual mode and settings for manual mode 2
Press key "100%" if you wish to set the programmed spindle speed.
100%

2.2.6 Machine-specific functions

Function

Gear stage

Machine T, S, M, ... If your machine has a gear unit for the spindle, you can set the gear
Manual
stage in selection field "Gear stage" in menu "T, S, M, ..."
and then activate it by pressing "NC Start".

Other special functions The machine manufacturer determines which additional special
functions are available for your use.
Please read the information provided by the machine manufacturer!

2.2.7 Switch over machining plane/tool axis

Function

Machine T, S, M, ... If your machine has a swivel-mounted work spindle, you can select the
Manual
machining plane in the "Tool axis" selection field in menu "T, S, M, ...".

This parameter is relevant for all screenforms in the Manual area, i.e.
it influences the parameter displays for face milling or measurements.
In addition, the plane setting determines how tool offsets are
calculated in workpiece and tool measurements.

For instructions on how to swivel the spindle, please refer to


information supplied by the machine manufacturer.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-45
Operation 08.00
2 2.2 Manual mode and settings for manual mode 2

2.2.8 Switch over to mm or inches

Function

The selected unit of measurement affects the actual value display and
distance-defining parameters.

Machine T, S, M, ... You can switch over between mm and inches in the "Unit of
Manual
measurement" selection field in menu "T, S, M, ..." in the "Machine
Manual" operating mode

and then activate it by pressing "NC Start".

The setting applies to the Manual area and remains valid until you
switch to the other unit. In Automatic mode, the unit of measurement
displayed in the program header is always activated.

Tool offsets and zero offsets remain in the original basic system in
which the system is set.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-46 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.3 Set a new position value (basic offset) 2

2.3 Set a new position value (basic offset)

Function

You can use the "Set basic ZO" function to enter a new position value
for each individual axis in the actual value display.
The difference between the position value in the machine coordinate
system MCS and the new position value in the workpiece coordinate
system WCS is entered in "Basic zero offset" in menu "Zero offset".

Operating sequence

Move the machine axes to the desired position (e.g. workpiece


surface).

Machine Set basic Select the "Set basic ZO" menu in operating mode "Machine Manual".
Manual ZO

Basic offset menu

Set position value You can enter new position values in the following ways:

• Directly via the input keypad.


Increase/decrease value via cursor keys. Terminate the input by
pressing the "Input" key.
• Via softkeys if you want to set position values to 0.

Reset basic offset

Select with softkey Delete


basic ZO

The basic offset is reset again when you select softkey


"Delete basic ZO".

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-47
Operation 08.00
2 2.4 Set up workpiece 2
2.4 Set up workpiece

Function

ShopMill supports you in setting up workpieces, whether you are doing


so manually or automatically. You can use both edge probes and 3D
probes as sensing tools.

Set up When a workpiece is set up with an edge probe, it is assumed that the
with an edge probe workpiece position on the machine table is unknown, but that the
dimensional variations of the probe are known. The position to be
measured is approached manually, for example, by means of a
handwheel, allowing a corner point or the position of an edge to be
measured.

Instead of an edge probe, you can also use any other tool of which you
know the radius and length.
Set up Precondition: A 3D probe type tool is mounted in the spindle.
with a sensor probe A measuring cycle is called in automatic setup mode. The
approximate position of the workpiece is known in this case. The
measuring cycle automatically generates the measuring distances and
intermediate positions from the starting point reached as a function of
preset setpoints. All measuring points required to take the
measurement are approached. Once the measurements have been
taken, the result is automatically calculated (corner, center-point hole,
spigot) in the cycle according to the selected measurement method.
Prepositioning can be done manually or implemented in a program.

2.4.1 Accept a zero offset from the zero offset list

Operating sequence

You have already called the zero offset list.

Zero point When you select softkey "Zero point workpiece", the selected zero
workpiece
offset is entered under parameter "Zero offset" in the "Zero point
workpiece" input screenform.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-48 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.4 Set up workpiece 2

2.4.2 Manual setup with an edge probe

Set a reference point in any axis

Operating sequence

Preconditions The edge probe has been loaded into the spindle.
The spindle speed is set and the spindle is rotating.

Approach the workpiece Position the edge probe in the desired axis direction in front of the
workpiece, e.g. in direction X.

Select the function Zero point Edge X Z


workpiece ...
with softkeys
Make settings in input • Set the calculated offset in which
screenform the measurement result must be
stored:
− Basic zero offset
− or the zero offset transferred
from the zero offset list
• Direction: Contact direction of
selected axis, e.g. in –X
• Enter setpoint of reference point
(edge).

Set The zero offset is calculated when you press the "Set zero offset"
zero offset
softkey.

The tool radius is included in the edge measurement calculation.


Example: Setpoint position X0 = 0
Contact direction +X
Tool radius = 2 mm
⇒ X = –2

Corner as reference
point

Operating sequence

Preconditions The edge probe has been loaded into the spindle.
The spindle speed is set and the spindle is rotating.

Approach the workpiece Move edge probe to a selected position on the workpiece.

Select the function Zero point Edge


workpiece
with softkeys

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-49
Operation 08.00
2 2.4 Set up workpiece 2
Make settings in input • Set the calculated offset in which
screenform the measurement result must be
stored:
− Basic zero offset
− or the zero offset transferred
from the zero offset list
• Position: Set the corner to be
applied as the reference point
• Enter the setpoint position of the
reference point (corner).

Approach the contact points Move edge probe to the first contact point P1 on the workpiece edge.

Store Store contact point P1


P1
Repeat process for contact points P2 ... P4

Set When you select softkey "Set position", the zero offset and rotation α0
position
are calculated.

Three contact points are sufficient to make the calculation on a


rectangular workpiece.

2.4.3 Manual setup with a 3D probe

Set a reference point in any axis

Operating sequence

Precondition The 3D probe is loaded in the spindle and already calibrated.

Approach the workpiece Position the 3D probe in the desired axis direction in front of the
workpiece, e.g. in direction X.

Select the function Zero point Edge X Z


workpiece ...
with softkeys

Make settings in input • Set the offset in which the


screenform measurement result must be
stored:
− Basic zero offset
− or the zero offset transferred
from the zero offset list
• Direction: Set contact direction for
selected axis for which the
reference point is to be set,
e.g. in –X.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-50 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.4 Set up workpiece 2
• Enter setpoint of reference point (edge).

When you press "NC Start", the measuring process commences


automatically at a measuring feedrate set via machine data.
• Sensor outputs "Measure now" signal
• Automatic retraction to start position at rapid traverse
• The calculated value is written into the zero offset.

Corner as reference
point

Operating sequence

Precondition The 3D probe is loaded in the spindle and already calibrated.

Approach the workpiece Position the 3D probe at a selected corner of the workpiece.

Select the function Zero point Edge


workpiece
with softkeys
Make settings in input • Set the calculated offset in which
screenform the measurement result must be
stored:
− Basic zero offset
− or the zero offset transferred
from the zero offset list
• Position: Set the corner to be
applied as the reference point
• Enter the setpoint position of the
reference point (corner).

Approach the contact points Position the 3D probe at the first contact point P1 on the workpiece
edge.

When you press "NC Start", the measuring process commences


automatically at a measuring feedrate set via machine data.
• Sensor outputs "Measure now" signal
• Automatic retraction to start position at rapid traverse

The position values of contact point P1 are stored automatically.


Repeat "Approach contact points" for points P2 ... P4.

Calculate The zero offset is calculated when you select softkey "Calculate
corner
corner".

• The sequence for approaching contact points P1...P4 must be


observed.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-51
Operation 08.00
2 2.4 Set up workpiece 2
• To obtain greater accuracy, it is advisable to repeat the measuring
process again. The angle α0 is taken into account for the second
measurement.

Arc center as reference point


The center points of holes and spigots can be used as reference
points with a 3D probe.

Holes: ShopMill automatically contacts the inside wall of the hole in all
four coordinate axis directions.

Spigots: ShopMill automatically contacts the outside wall of the spigot


in all four coordinate axis directions.

Holes
Operating sequence

Precondition The 3D probe is loaded in the spindle and already calibrated.

Approach the workpiece Position the 3D probe in the approximate arc center of the hole.

Select the function Zero point Holes


workpiece
with softkeys
Make settings in input • Set the calculated offset in which
screenform the measurement result must be
stored:
− Basic zero offset
− or the zero offset transferred
from the zero offset list
• Diameter: Enter the approximate
diameter of the hole. If you do not
enter a diameter, the probe
contacts the hole wall from the
starting point at the measurement
feedrate.
• Enter setpoint position of the
hole arc center.

The measuring process is executed automatically when you press


"NC Start".
The 3D probe contacts 4 points in succession around the inside wall of
the hole.

When the measurement has been taken, the set offset is calculated.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-52 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.4 Set up workpiece 2

Spigots
Operating sequence

Precondition The 3D probe is loaded in the spindle and already calibrated.

Approach the workpiece Position the 3D probe over the approximate arc center of the spigot.

Select the function Zero point Circle


workpiece
with softkeys

Make settings in input • Set the calculated offset in which


screenform the measurement result must be
stored:
− Basic zero offset
− or the zero offset transferred
from the zero offset list
• Diameter: Enter the approximate
spigot diameter (check the
diameter >0, safety clearance,
allowance for probe
compensations).
• Enter the setpoint position of the spigot center point.
• Enter the measurement infeed depth.

The measuring process is executed automatically when you press


"NC Start".
The 3D probe contacts 4 points in succession around the spigot
outside wall.
When the measurement has been taken, the set offset is calculated.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-53
Operation 08.00
2 2.4 Set up workpiece 2

2.4.4 Calibrate the workpiece probe

Function

On milling machines and machining centers, the probe is normally


loaded from a tool magazine into the spindle. This may cause errors to
occur in subsequent measurements as a result of the probe clamping
tolerances in the spindle. In addition, the trigger point of the probe in
relation to the spindle center has to be calculated exactly.
A calibration cycle is provided for this purpose. This allows the probe
to be calibrated in any hole or on a surface.

Calibrate the workpiece You can use this cycle to calibrate the probe in any hole in a reference
probe in any hole piece, e.g. on the workpiece or in a setting ring gauge (see diagram
below). The calculated trigger points are automatically loaded to the
corresponding data area of an internal module.

Operating sequence

Preconditions A 3D probe is mounted in the spindle. The exact radius of the probe
ball must be entered in the tool offset block.
A setting ring gauge with known radius is used to calibrate the probe.

Approach the reference Position the 3D probe at the approximate hole center point in the
piece selected measuring plane and at calibration depth within the hole.

Select the function Zero point Calibrate Radius


workpiece probe >
with softkeys

Make settings in input Enter the diameter ∅ of the reference


screenform piece (in this case, the setting ring
gauge).

The calibration process is executed automatically when you press "NC


Start". The exact position of the center of the setting ring is determined
first. 4 trigger points inside the setting ring are then contacted.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-54 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.4 Set up workpiece 2
Calibrate the workpiece The measuring cycle permits the sensing probe to be calibrated on
probe on any surface any surface, e.g. on the workpiece, for the purpose of calculating its
length.

Operating sequence

Preconditions A 3D probe is mounted in the spindle. The exact radius of the probe
ball must be entered in the tool offset block.

Approach the workpiece Position the 3D probe opposite the calibration surface of the
workpiece.

Select the function Zero point Calibrate Length


workpiece probe >
with softkeys

Make settings in input Enter the known reference point Z0 of


screenform the machine table.

The calibration process is executed automatically when you press "NC


Start".
The 3D probe outputs a "Measure now" signal.

The calculated length of the 3D probe is stored in the tool offset data
block.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-55
Operation 08.00
2 2.5 Measuring tools in Manual area 2

2.5 Measuring tools in Manual area

2.5.1 Accept tool from the tool list

Operating sequence

You have called the tool list and the tool to be measured is loaded in
the spindle.

Measure When you press the "Measure tool" softkey, the tool is transferred to
tool
the "Measure tool" input screenform.

2.5.2 Measuring tools using scratching method


The diameter or radius of a tool can be defined via a machine data.
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!

Operating sequence

Precondition The tool to be measured is loaded in the spindle.

Approach the workpiece Infeed the tool to a known reference point, e.g. an edge of the
workpiece.

Select whether you wish to measure the radius/diameter or length of


the tool:

Select with softkey Measure Radius Length


tool manual or manual or
Measure Diameter Length
tool manual or manual

Measure tool radius/diameter Measure the tool length

Make settings in input • For tool radius/diameter: Enter the reference point, e.g. value
screenform for X0
• For tool length: Enter the reference point, e.g. a value for Z0

Start calculation Calculate Set Calculate Set


Select radius or length or diameter or diameter .
The tool geometry data for radius/diameter or length are calculated
and entered in the tool list.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-56 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.5 Measuring tools in Manual area 2
2.5.3 Measuring tools with a tool probe

Operating sequence

When you measure a tool with a tool probe (table contact system), you
can choose to measure either the radius or the length of the tool.

Precondition The tool probe has been calibrated.


Enter the tool geometry data (length or radius/diameter) as
approximate values in the tool offset data block of the tool list.
The tool to be measured is loaded in the spindle.
You must preposition the tool in such a way that it can approach the
tool probe without risk of collision.

Approach the tool probe Position the tool near the measuring surface of the tool probe.

Select whether you wish to measure the radius/diameter or length of


the tool:

Select with softkey Measure Radius Diameter Length


tool Auto or Auto or Auto

Measure tool length Measure tool radius/diameter

Make settings in input • Specify the tool to be measured T and the corresponding tool offset
screenform data block D1 or D2.
• Enter a length offset V (positive value), required, for example, for
ball end mills or mills with round tool inserts.

When you press "NC Start", the measurement is taken automatically


at the measuring feedrate.
The tool geometry data for radius or length are calculated and entered
in the tool list.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-57
Operation 08.00
2 2.5 Measuring tools in Manual area 2

2.5.4 Calibrate the tool probe

Function

Mechanical tool probes are typically cube-shaped or cylindrical. The


probe is installed in the working area of the machine (on the machine
table) and must be aligned in relation to the machining axes.
The "Calibrate probe" function uses the calibration tool to determine
the current distances between the machine zero and the tool probe
and automatically stores them in an internal data area. Tool type 120
(mill) can be entered as the calibration tool; no special calibration tool
type is provided.

Operating sequence

Preconditions The length and radius of the calibration tool must be stored in a tool
offset data block.
The calibration tool is loaded in the spindle.

Approach the tool probe Move the calibration tool until it is positioned over the approximate
center of the measuring surface of the tool probe.

Select with softkey Measure Calibrate


tool probe

Enter the method of measurement in the input screenform:


• Calibrate length only
• Calibrate length and diameter

Calibrate length and diameter Calibrate length only

When you press "NC Start", calibration is executed automatically at


the measuring feedrate.
The current distance measurements between the machine zero and
tool probe are calculated and stored in an internal data area.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-58 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.6 Machining in Manual mode 2

2.6 Machining in Manual mode

2.6.1 Change settings

Operating sequence

Select with softkey Machine Settings


Manual

Default settings are entered in this menu for

• Return plane
The return plane is the position above the workpiece approached
by a cycle in rapid traverse during, for example, face milling
operations.
• Safety clearance
The safety clearance is the distance between the tool tip and the
workpiece surface. This position is approached in rapid traverse.
The programmed cycle, e.g. face milling, is then executed at the
programmed machining feedrate.

These settings remain valid until you change them.

2.6.2 Positioning

Operating sequence

In Manual mode, you can move the axes to certain positions for the
purpose of performing simple machining operations.

Select with softkeys Machine Positioning


Manual

Select the axis/axes that you wish to


move and enter its/their target position/s.
Enter your selected setting for feedrate F,
e.g. 1000 mm/min.

Rapid Alternatively, you can select this softkey to move the axes in rapid
traverse
traverse.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-59
Operation 08.00
2 2.6 Machining in Manual mode 2

The axes are moved to the specified target position when you press
"NC Start".

2.6.3 Face milling

Function

You can use this cycle to face mill any workpiece. The cycle
distinguishes between rough cutting (repeated end milling of surface
with depth infeed inside workpiece) and finish cutting (single end mill
operation on surface with retraction of mill and depth infeed outside
workpiece).

Select with softkeys Machine Face


Manual milling

Then select the desired direction of machining and enter parameter


settings in input screenform.

Please also note instructions regarding face milling


in Section "Programming – Face Milling".
Confirm your inputs with softkey "OK"

and go to the program view in the Manual area:

Example of face milling in the program view

Press the "NC Start" key to start the "Face milling" cycle.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-60 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.7 MDA mode 2

2.7 MDA mode


Function

You can write and execute programs block by block in G code in


"MDA" (Manual Data Automatic) mode. To do this, you enter specific
movements as individual program blocks in the control via the
keyboard.

The "MDA" program view displays position, feedrate, spindle and tool
values as well as the contents of the MDA program.

Example of a program in the "MDA" program view

Start program
The control executes the blocks you have entered when you press the
"NC Start" key.

Delete program
Delete Programs written in MDA mode are automatically deleted as soon as
MDA prog.
they have finished running. Alternatively, you can delete them by
selecting softkey "Delete MDA program".

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-61
Operation 08.00
2 2.8 Automatic mode 2

2.8 Automatic mode

In the "Machine Auto" operating mode, you can execute machining


programs and monitor the progress of the current machining operation
online on the screen.

Preconditions The preconditions for executing machining programs are as follows:


• You have already synchronized the control measuring system with
the machine (i.e. "approached" reference points).
• You have already written the program to be executed in ShopMill.
• You have checked or entered the necessary offset values, e.g.
zero offsets and tool offsets.
• The required safety interlocks are already active.

Example of program view in "Machine Auto"

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-62 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.8 Automatic mode 2

2.8.1 Switchover between "T, F, S", "G functions" and "Auxiliary functions" displays

Function

You can switch from the "T, F, S" status display to the "G functions" or
"Auxiliary functions" displays in the "Machine Auto" and "Machine
Manual" program views.

Operating sequence

G function The "G functions" box containing the active G functions is displayed.
Every G group has a predefined position. The group number (No.) and
the current G function of the G groups are displayed only if a G
function is active.

Deselection You can switch back to the "T, F, S" status display by pressing softkey
"G function" again.

Auxiliary All active auxiliary functions are displayed in the "Auxiliary function"
function
box. 5 M functions and 3 H functions are displayed in total.

Deselection You can switch back to the "T, F, S" status display by pressing softkey
"Auxiliary function" again.

2.8.2 Select a program for execution

Operating sequence

Select with softkey Program


Manager
or key P rog ram
M anage r

Select a program in the "Directory" menu

Execute Press softkey "Execute"

The program is selected and you switch automatically to the "Machine


Auto" operating mode.

If you select a machining program with contour pockets for the first
time, the depths of cut for the contour pocket are calculated
automatically. This process may take several seconds depending on
the complexity of the contour.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-63
Operation 08.00
2 2.8 Automatic mode 2
2.8.3 Start/stop/abort program

Function

The following subsection describes how you can start and stop
programs or continue them after an abort command.

Operating sequence

Precondition No alarms are currently active.


The program is selected.
The feedrate enable signal is set.
The spindle enable signal is set.

Start program

The program is started and executed.

Stop/abort program

Processing is interrupted in a block, i.e. the block is not executed to


the block end.
You can restart the program by pressing "NC Start".

The active program is aborted.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-64 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.8 Automatic mode 2

2.8.4 Interrupt program

Retract tool from contour


After you have interrupted a program ("NC Stop") in Automatic mode
(e.g. in order to take a measurement on the workpiece and correct the
tool wear values or after tool breakage), you can retract the tool from
the contour in "Machine Manual" mode. In such cases, ShopMill stores
the coordinates of the interruption point and displays the differences in
distance traveled by the axes in "Machine Manual" mode as a "Repos"
(= Reposition) offset in the actual value window.

For details of how to traverse machine axes, please refer to Section


"Traverse machine axes".

Reposition tool on
contour
The "Repos" function repositions the tool on the workpiece contour
after traversal of the machine axes during a program interruption in
Automatic mode.

Operating sequence

Precondition "Machine Manual" operating mode is selected.


The axes have been moved away from the point of interruption.

Selects the "Repos" machine function.

Select the axis that you wish to move and


X ...

then press the "+" or "–" key.

You will not be able to move the axis beyond the point of interruption.
The feed override is operative.

Warning

The rapid traverse override key is active.


Non-adjusted Repos offsets will be adjusted automatically with
program feedrate and linear interpolation when you switch over to
Automatic and press "NC Start".

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-65
Operation 08.00
2 2.8 Automatic mode 2

2.8.5 Enter a program at any selected point

Block search

Function

The block search function allows you to run the program forward until
the selected block is reached. You can use one of three search
methods:

1. Calculation to contour:
During a block search with calculation to contour, the same
calculations are performed as in normal program operation. The
entire target block is subsequently executed in an identical manner
to normal program execution.

2. Start calculation to end point/block search:


During a block search with calculation, the same calculations are
performed as in normal program operation. The end point of the
target block or the next programmed position is then approached
according to the interpolation mode programmed for the target
block.

3. Without calculation
No calculations are performed during the block search.
The internal control values are set to the states prior to the block
search.
This variant is displayed as an extra option only for G code
programs!

You can specify the search target by


• positioning the cursor directly on program blocks (technology and
position blocks)
• entering a text string.

Operating sequence

Precondition The program in which you want to find a block is selected in "Machine
Auto" mode.

Direct search on program


blocks

Position the cursor on the desired target block.

Block Switches to the "Block search" function to set a search target.


search

Select one of the available search methods.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-66 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.8 Automatic mode 2
You can select one of the following strategies to search for a block:

To Start
contour search run

ShopMill cycle If the search target is a position block, a window will be displayed in
which you can choose the technology from the chained program
blocks.

You can abort the selection by pressing "Cancel".

When you select "Accept", a window is displayed in which you can


enter the start hole number from the chained position block for the
selected technology.

G code program The available block search methods in G code program are as follows:

To Start Without
contour search run calculation

When you press NC Start, the axis travel motions calculated from the
block search are executed. The program is then processed starting at
this target block.

Abort block search

You can abort the block search by pressing "Reset".

Aborts the "Block search" function.

Search via a text string

Search You define the search target by entering a text string in a window. You
can also select whether the search must start at the program
beginning or from the current cursor position.

Continue The search is continued until the next matching text string is found.
search

When you press NC Start, the axis travel motions calculated from the
block search are executed. The program is then processed starting at
this target block.

You can abort the block search by pressing "Reset".

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-67
Operation 08.00
2 2.8 Automatic mode 2

2.8.6 Program control

Function

In "Machine Auto" and "MDA" modes, you can intervene in the


execution of a program using functions
• Conditional stop (M01),
• Program test/dry run feedrate (PRT/DRY),
• Skip (SKP)
• and single block fine (see Section "Execute a trial program run" for
details).
Program In "Machine Auto" mode you can enter the functions via the "Program
control
control" softkey; in "MDA" mode you must enter the functions as G
code commands.

Conditional stop
Function

When this function is active, processing of the program ceases at


each block in which an "Optional stop" has been programmed.
"Stop: M0/M1 active" is then displayed on the screen.

Operating sequence

Precondition The program is selected in "Machine Auto" or "MDA" mode.

Select with softkeys Conditional


stop

Start the program again by pressing the "NC Start" key.

Deselect with softkey Conditional


stop

If this function is not active, the program is not stopped at special


function M01 (in program block).

Program testing
Function

When the "Program test" function is active, the control system checks
programs and program sections for the following errors without
moving the machine axes:

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-68 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.8 Automatic mode 2
• Geometric incompatibilities
• Missing data
• Non-executable instruction sequences and jumps
• Violation of working area

The following functions can be used in "Program test" mode:


• Stop program with "Conditional stop"
• Graphic screen representation via "Simultaneous recording"
(see Section "Simultaneous recording before machining").

Further notes

The machine and auxiliary functions provided for program testing are
output by the NC and can be inhibited by the machine manufacturer.

Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!

Dry run feedrate


Function

When you press softkey "Dry run feed", the programmed feedrate is
replaced by a dry run feedrates defined in a machine data.

The dry run feedrate must also be set for graphic screen
representation of the machining operation (see Section "Simultaneous
recording before machining").

Skip block
Function

G code blocks which need not be executed in every program run can
be skipped. If you wish a block to be skipped, you must identify it by
inserting a "/" (slash) character in front of the block number.

Select with softkeys Skip

You can deactivate the function by pressing the "Skip" softkey again.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-69
Operation 08.00
2 2.8 Automatic mode 2

2.8.7 Simultaneous recording before machining

Function

The "Program test" function offers you the option of graphically


simulating a program run in Automatic mode before it is machined, i.e.
without moving the machine axes.

This simulation function is optional.

The graphic displays a workpiece as if it were being machined with a


cylindrical tool.

Status displays The status displays in the graphic contain information about
• the current axis coordinates and
• the program block currently being processed.

Operating sequence

Precondition The program is selected in "Machine Auto" mode.

Program Program Select softkeys "Program control" and "Program test".


control test
Dry run
If you select softkey "Dry run feedrate" as well, the programmed feed
feedrate velocity is replaced by a dry run feedrate defined in a machine data.

Simultan. Select softkey "Simultaneous recording" and


recording
start the program with "NC Start".

You can still use the program control functions such as "NC Stop",
"Single block", "Feedrate override", etc.

Program When you press softkey "Program view", the display changes from the
view
"Simultaneous recording" graphic to the program view in Automatic
mode. The system continues to record graphic data as a background
function.

You can return to the graphic display by pressing one of the following
softkeys:

Plan view • plan view,

• representation in 3 planes or

• 3D representation (volume model).

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-70 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.8 Automatic mode 2
Delete You can select softkey "Delete screen" to clear the machining
screen
operation graphic which has already been recorded while the program
is executing. Recording of the machining operation will however
continue.

For further information about the principles and operation, please refer
to Section "Simulation".

2.8.8 Simultaneous recording during machining

Function

You can track the current machining operation on the machine tool
simultaneously by monitoring the graphic display on the control
screen.
This function is optional.

Operating sequence

Precondition Program test and dry run feedrate must not be selected.

Simultan. Select softkey "Simultaneous recording" and


recording
start the program with "NC Start".

The "simultaneous recording" function can be switched on at any time


during machining.

An explanation of the functions available under "Simultaneous


recording" can be found in Sections "Simultaneous recording before
machining" and "Simulation".

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-71
Operation 08.00
2 2.9 Execute a trial program run 2

2.9 Execute a trial program run

2.9.1 Single block

Function

When this function is active, the program is interrupted after every


block which initiates some operation on the machine (these do no
include arithmetic blocks).
Default setting The following defaults apply:
• A single block includes
• the whole machining operation in the case of drilling operations and
the machining operations on one plane in the case of pocket milling.

Select with softkey Single


block fine

"Single block fine" active When the "Single block fine" function is active, each individual drill
infeed and pocket milling motion is executed as a separate block.

Select with softkey Single


block fine

Single block via machine


control panel

Activate the "Single block" function in "Machine Auto" mode. It will


allow you to process a program block by block. The appropriate LED
on the machine control panel lights up to indicate that single block
mode is active.

If you have selected single block machining,


• the text "Stop: Block ended in single block" is displayed in the
channel operating message line when the program is interrupted
• the current program block will not be executed until you press the
"NC Start" key,
• the program stops automatically after a block has been processed,
• the following block will be processed when you press the "NC Start"
key again.

Deselect single block mode

You can deselect the function by pressing the "Single block" key
again.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-72 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
2 2
08.00 Operation
2.9 Execute a trial program run

2.9.2 Correct program

Function

As soon as the control detects a syntax error in the program, it


interrupts the program and displays the syntax error in the alarm line.
In the event of such errors (program Stop status), you can correct the
program in the program editor.

Operating sequence

Precondition The program is selected in "Machine Auto" mode.


The program is in the Stop or Reset state.

Select with softkey Correct


program

The program editor appears on the screen.

If an error has occurred, the errored block is marked. Press the "Input"
key and then correct the block.

Press softkey "Accept" to transfer the correction to the current


program.

Machine After you have made the correction, you can continue processing by
from here pressing this softkey and "NC Start".

• NC Stop status:
You can only modify blocks that have not yet been executed or
read in by the NC.
• Reset status:
You can modify any block.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-73
Operation 08.00
2 2.10 Tools and tool offsets 2

2.10 Tools and tool offsets

ShopMill offers you a tool management facility based on the following


list:
• Tool list
• Tool wear list
• Magazine list

Enter the tools and their offset data in the tool list or tool wear list. You
will be able to identify in the magazine list which magazine locations
are disabled or not.

Depending on individual requirements, a tool list might consist of the


following:
• A tool change involving
− a spindle or dual gripper
− or a spindle with dual gripper
• at least one tool magazine
• and tools that are not assigned to any tool magazine.

For details of the functionality of your tool management system, please


refer to the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual.

Tool list The tool list displays all tools and their offset data stored as a tool data
block in the NC, irrespective of whether or not they are assigned to a
magazine location. The tool list offers you all commonly used tools.
You can assign geometric and technological tool data to tool types.
Various different examples of each tool might exist to which you can
assign the current offset data of the tool being used.

You can load and unload tools to and from a magazine via the tool list.
When a tool is loaded, it is moved from its storage location to a
magazine location. When it is unloaded, it is removed from the
magazine and taken back to a storage location.
This loading and unloading of tool magazines is defined in a machine
data.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-74 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.10 Tools and tool offsets 2

Example of a tool list with variable location assignment

The main display of the "Tools" operating area shows the current tool
list with the following data:

Location Location number


The following designations/symbols are used for:
• The spindle location
• The locations for gripper 1 and gripper 2 (applies only when a
spindle with dual gripper is used)
• The magazine location numbers
If the configuration includes more than one magazine, the
magazine number is specified first followed by the location number
in the magazine:
e.g. 1/10 = Magazine 1 with location number 10
2/5 = Magazine 2 with location number 5
• Tools that are not assigned to a magazine in the tool list are stored
in a location without location number.

Type Tool type


Depending on the tool type (represented by a symbol), only certain tool
offset data are enabled.
Tool name The name of the tool can be entered as text or a number (see Section
"Change tool names").
DP Duplo number of twin tool (replacement tool)
1st/2nd edge Tool offset data "Length", "Diameter/radius" and "Angle" for the 1st
and/or 2nd edge of a tool (if applicable).
The "H" column is displayed only for ISO dialect0-M programs. Every
H number of an ISO dialect0-M program must be assigned to a tool
offset data record.
N Number of teeth on a mill
Spindle direction of rotation

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-75
Operation 08.00
2 2.10 Tools and tool offsets 2
Coolant supply 1 and 2 can be switched on and off

Tool-spec. fct 1...4 Other tool-specific functions such as additional coolant supply,
monitoring functions for speed, tool breakage, etc.

The "Details" softkey displays the additional parameters "Rounding


radius" or "Angle" for 3D tapered milling tools.

Tool wear list You can select which tool wear data (length and radius/diameter) are
applicable in the tool wear list. You can also set the following
monitoring functions for a tool.
• Monitoring of actual time of use (service life, number of
workpieces)
• Monitoring of number of tool load operations
• Other tool status data (disable tool, tool in fixed location, oversized
tool)

Tool magazine The magazine locations with tools are specified in the magazine list.
The list also indicates whether the magazine location is disabled
(location disable) and the properties (tool status) assigned to the tools.

Fixed/variable location You can set a machine data to determine whether all tools must have
assignment a variable or fixed location assignment in the magazine.
If you select a variable location assignment, the tools are taken to the
next available space in the magazine after a tool change. With a fixed
location assignment, the tools are always taken back to the location
assigned specifically to them.
Please refer to the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual for
details about location assignments in the tool magazine!

2.10.1 Select the tool list

Operating sequence

Select with softkey Tools Tool


zero pt. list
or key Tool
Offset

The tool list will appear on your screen.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-76 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.10 Tools and tool offsets 2

2.10.2 Create a new tool

Function

You create new tools directly in the tool list. A selection of tool types
are displayed for this purpose. The tool type determines which
geometry data are required and how they will be computed. The
following common tool types are available:

Operating sequence

Select with softkeys Tool New


list tool

Use the cursor keys to select the tool location you want

Cutter 3D and confirm your selected tool type with the softkey.
... tools
A new tool is then created.

3D tools In addition to the geometry data in the tool list, you must specify
further parameters for 3D tools.

Type Name Additional parameter


110 Cylindrical die mill -
111 Ball end mill Rounding radius
121 End mill with corner rounding Rounding radius
155 Bevel cutter mill Angle for tapered tools
156 Tapered mill with corner rounding Rounding radius, angle for tapered tools
157 Tapered die mill Angle for tapered tools

Details
Press the "Details" softkey and enter the rounding radius or angle for
tapered milling tools.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-77
Operation 08.00
2 2.10 Tools and tool offsets 2

2.10.3 Create tool offset block for tool edge1/2

ShopMill allows you to assign different tool offset blocks to tools with 2
edges, e.g. a counterbore, i.e. one block for each tool edge.

All the tool parameters which define a tool are stored in the tool offset
block for edge 1 (D1) or 2 (D2).
These parameters are the
• tool type (identical for edges 1 and 2)
• geometry values (length, radius, angle) and
• wear values (length, radius).

An H number must be specified for ISO programs (e.g. ISO dialect 1).
This corresponds to a particular tool offset block.

When you create a new tool, the tool offset block for tool edge 1 is
automatically active.

Tool offset for 2nd tool Select softkey "2nd cutt. edge" to set up the offset data for a tool with
edge a 2nd cutting edge.

Select with softkey 2nd


cutt. edge
Enter the corresponding values in the list. The tool offset for the 2nd
edge is set up.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-78 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.10 Tools and tool offsets 2

2.10.4 Change the tool name

A newly created tool in the tool list is automatically assigned the name
of the selected tool group. You may change this designation as you
please to
• a tool name, e.g. "face_mill_120mm" or
• a tool number, e.g. "1" .
A tool name may contain a maximum of 17 characters. You can use
any letters, digits, the underscore symbol "_", dots "." and slashes "/".

2.10.5 Create a replacement tool

A replacement tool is one that can be employed to perform the same


machining operation as a tool that already exists (e.g. as a replace-
ment after tool breakage).

When you create a tool as a replacement, you must give it the same
name as an existing comparable tool.

Confirm the name with the "Input" key. The duplo number of the
replacement tool will be incremented by 1 automatically.

The order in which replacement tools are inserted in the spindle is


determined by duplo number DP.

2.10.6 Manual tools

Manual tools are tools which are needed during a machining operation
but which exist only in the tool list and not in the tool magazine. Tools
of this type have to be loaded and unloaded to and from the spindle by
hand.

Further notes
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-79
Operation 08.00
2 2.10 Tools and tool offsets 2

2.10.7 Tool offsets

Function

Why do we need tool You do not have to take tool diameters and lengths into account when
offsets? writing machining programs.
You can program workpiece dimensions directly, e.g. as specified in
the production drawing.
When a workpiece is machined, the tool paths are controlled as a
function of the relevant tool geometry in such a way that the
programmed contour can be produced with any tool employed.

Tool path

Contour

The control system Enter the tool data separately in the "Tool list" and "Tool wear" tables.
corrects the traversing When writing the program, you merely need to call the tool you
path require.
While the program is being processed, the control fetches the offset
data it requires from the tool table and corrects the tool path
individually for different tools.

Programmed contour

Corrected
tool path

What type of tool offsets The offset memory of a tool includes the following:
are available? • Tool type
The tool type determines which tool data are required and how they
must be calculated (e.g. drill, centering tool, mill).

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-80 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.10 Tools and tool offsets 2
• Total size: Length, radius, angle (drill)
These comprise several components (geometry, wear). The control
performs calculations on the components to obtain a final size (e.g.
total length, total radius). The relevant total dimension becomes
valid as soon as the offset memory is activated.

Length
Radius

Tool length This value compensates the differences in length between the tools
compensation you use.
The tool length is interpreted to be the distance between the toolholder
reference point and the tool tip. This length is measured and entered
in the tool list.
The control uses this measurement and the wear values to calculate
travel movements in the infeed direction.

Tool radius "Contour" and "Tool path" are not identical. The mill or tool edge
compensation radius center point must travel along an equidistant to the contour.
For this purpose, the programmed tool center point path is displaced –
as a function of radius and machining direction – in such a way that
the tool edge travels exactly along the programmed contour.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-81
Operation 08.00
2 2.10 Tools and tool offsets 2
The tool radius must be entered in the tool list. While a program is
running, the control fetches the radii it requires and uses them to
calculate the tool path.

Equidistant

Offset values for Infeed G eom etry in plan e


Radius

Z Length in Z
milling tool (example) Radius in X/Y
F
Y Length in Y F - Toolholder
Radius in Z/X reference point

X Length in X Length
Radius in Y/Z

Offset values for Infeed Geometry in plane Radius

drill (example) Z Length in Z F


F
Y Length in Y Angle

Length
X Length in X
F - Toolholder reference point

Offset values are used in the simulation display and programming


graphic for the following tools:

• Drill: Angle and radius/diameter


• Centering tool: Radius/diameter

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-82 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.10 Tools and tool offsets 2

2.10.8 Special tool functions

Function

You can assign other functions to tool types in the tool list.

Number of teeth N Specify the number of teeth in this parameter. Parameter N is tool-
dependent and can be applied only for milling tools. The control
system calculates feedrate F internally if the feed is set in mm/tooth in
the program.

Using the "Alternat." softkey, you can activate and deactivate the
spindle direction of rotation (CCW/CW) in parameter "Spindle".

The spindle rotates in the Select with


clockwise direction of rotation. softkey
The spindle rotates in the
counterclockwise direction of
rotation.
The spindle is stopped.

You can assign a supply of coolant to the tool in parameters "Coolant


1" and "Coolant 2".

Switch coolant ON: Select with softkey

Do not switch coolant


ON:

Tool-specific functions You can also assign another four machine-specific actions to a tool.
You can activate or deactivate these functions using the "Alternat."
softkey. Tool-specific functions might include, for example, a 3rd
coolant supply or a tool breakage monitor.
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-83
Operation 08.00
2 2.10 Tools and tool offsets 2

2.10.9 Create tool wear data

The wear data for an existing tool must be entered in the tool wear list.

Select with softkey Tool wear

The following menu will appear on your screen:

Example of a tool wear list with variable location assignment

Allowances for You must enter the delta values for length (∆length) and radius
length and radii (∆radius) /diameter (∆∅) for tools in the tool wear list.
Please note that
• a positive delta value signifies allowance (e.g. for subsequent finish
cuts) and
• a negative delta value signifies undersize (tool wear)

Radius

Radius
D R<0
Length
D R>0

D L<0 DL>0

DL= D Length DR= DRadius

Allowances/undersizes for a corner radius mill

The correction values entered in tables "Tool list" and "Tool wear"
become operative immediately a tool is called and inserted in the
spindle.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-84 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.10 Tools and tool offsets 2
2.10.10 Tool monitoring

You can assign the following tool monitoring functions and features to
every tool in the tool wear list:
• Tool life
• No. of loadings
• Other tool properties
− Disable tool
− Tool in fixed location
− Oversized tool

Further notes
The tool monitoring functions are activated via a machine data.
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!

Select with softkey Tool Tool


list wear

Tool life T The tool life monitoring function is applied to the tool cutting edge
(D1 or D2) that is currently in use. The monitoring function must be
explicitly activated for this purpose. Monitoring times are set on a
minutes scale and can be entered accordingly.
When the remaining tool life is = 0, the tool is set to "disabled". It will
be discarded after the next tool change.
If a tool is programmed again following a tool change operation, the
system checks whether the tool life has already expired. If it has, a
replacement tool is inserted in its place (if available).

No. of loadings C The number of times that a tool may be loaded in the spindle to
perform a machining operation must be entered in this parameter.
If the number of spindle loading operations ("no. of loadings") has
reached zero, the tool is disabled.

You can activate the type of monitoring you want in parameter T/C
after selecting the "Alternat." key. Enter the appropriate setting in the
relevant input field.

Other tool properties You can assign the following additional properties to a tool:
• G: Disable tool, e.g. when the tool edge is worn.
• U: Tool oversized, i.e. half of each of the adjacent magazine
locations (to left and right of location in question) is disabled.
• P: Tool at fixed location, i.e. the tool is permanently assigned to a
particular magazine location (fixed-location-coded).

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-85
Operation 08.00
2 2.10 Tools and tool offsets 2
Select the function you require with the cursor keys and activate it with
softkey "Alternat.".

2.10.11 Magazine list

The magazine locations with tools are specified in the magazine list.
The list also indicates whether the magazine location is disabled
(location disable) and the properties (tool status) assigned to the tools.

Select with softkey Tool Magazine


list

Example of magazine with variable assignment

Disable magazine location Magazine locations can be reserved or disabled for specific tools, e.g.
for oversized tools.

Select the magazine location you wish to disable.

Toggle with the "Alternat." softkey in the "Location disable" column


until a "G" (= disabled) is displayed in the correct field. This location is
now disabled. You will not be able to load any tool into this location.

Tool status The "Tool status" column lists the properties which have been
assigned to the currently active tool:
• G: Tool is disabled
• U: Tool is oversized
• P: Tool has a permanent location assignment

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-86 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.10 Tools and tool offsets 2

2.10.12 Delete a tool

Function

Tools can be deleted in the tool list.

Operating sequence

Select the tool that you wish to delete.

Delete
Delete
Select the softkey "Delete tool" and confirm by selecting the "Delete"
tool
button. The tool data for the selected tool are deleted. The magazine
location in which the tool was stored is enabled.

2.10.13 Change the tool type

Function

You can change a tool type into another tool type in the tool list.

Operating sequence

Select the tool that you wish to delete. The cursor is positioned on
input field "Type".
Press the "Alternat." key to select the new tool type.
The input fields for the new tool type are displayed.

2.10.14 Load a tool

Function

You can load a tool directly to the spindle or to another free location in
the magazine from the tool list.

Operating sequence

Precondition The machine data for tool management with loading/unloading is set.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-87
Operation 08.00
2 2.10 Tools and tool offsets 2
Further notes
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!

Select with softkey Tools Tool


zero pt. list
or key Tool
Offset

The "Tool list" menu is displayed on the screen.

Select the tool that you wish to delete.

Load Select softkey "Load".

A window headed "Empty location" containing the number of the first


free magazine location appears on the screen.
You can now enter a new location number

or

Spindle load the tool directly into the spindle.

Starts the loading operation.


The tool is loaded to the specified magazine location.

Aborts the loading operation.

2.10.15 Unload a tool

Function

When a tool is unloaded, it is removed from the magazine and entered


in a store position in the tool list. The tool offset data block is not
deleted. The unloaded tool has no location number in the store
position.

Operating sequence

Precondition The machine data for tool management with loading/unloading is set.

Further notes
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!

Select with softkey Tools Tool


zero pt. list

or key Tool
Offset

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-88 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.10 Tools and tool offsets 2
The "Tool list" menu is displayed on the screen.

Select a tool.

Unload Select softkey "Unload".

The tool is removed from the magazine and taken back to a storage
location.

2.10.16 Sort tools

Function

Tools can be sorted in the tool list or tool wear list according to
magazine assignment, tool name (alphabetic) or tool type. When they
are sorted according to magazine assignment, empty magazine
locations are displayed as well.

Operating sequence

Select with softkey Tool sort Tool wear sort


list > or >

to to to
magazine or name or type

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-89
Operation 08.00
2 2.11 Zero offsets 2

2.11 Zero offsets

2.11.1 General

Machine/ After referencing, the actual values are referred to the machine zero M
workpiece zero of the machine coordinate system MCS. The machining program for
the workpiece is referred to the workpiece zero W of the workpiece
coordinate system WCS.
The machine zero and workpiece zero do not have to be identical. The
distance between the machine zero and workpiece zero may vary
depending on the workpiece type and clamping method. This zero
offset is taken into account when the workpiece program is processed.

ZW
Zm Yw
Ym
ZO1

W ZO2
Basic offset
M
Xm Xw

Example of a zero offset on a milling machine


The following offsets can be activated:

Basic offset You can use the basic offset to redefine the zero point of the
workpiece coordinate system within the machine coordinate system.

Settable zero offset The settable zero offsets can be used to set up a workpiece zero
referred to the zero of the machine coordinate system in all axes. The
settable zero offset is referred to the base offset.

Programmable offsets In addition to the basic offset and settable offset, programmable
offsets can also be applied in the called program:

• Active zero offsets


• Offset
• Rotation
• Scaling
• Mirroring

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-90 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.11 Zero offsets 2
The programmable zero offset refers to the settable zero offset.
Please also refer to the description in Section "Programming, zero
offsets".

DRF offset The DRF offset (Differential Resolver Function) generates an


incremental zero offset in Automatic mode in conjunction with an
electronic handwheel.

Total offset The total offset is the sum of all offsets in the machine coordinate
system.

Further notes

The number of settable zero offsets (up to 100) is defined by a


machine data.
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!

2.11.2 Display a zero offset

Function

The "Zero offset" overview lists the following information:


• Current axis positions in the machine and tool coordinate systems,
• all existing zero offsets and
• the total offset.

Additional By selecting softkey "Additional axes", you can display a further two
axes
axes (rotary axes) and their offsets. These additional axes are each
activated via display machine data.

Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-91
Operation 08.00
2 2.11 Zero offsets 2

Operating sequence

Select with softkey Tools Zero


zero pt. offset

The following menu will appear on your screen:

Example of a zero offset


Base The basic offset entered in "Machine Manual" mode and the "Basic
zero offset" menu is displayed here for each axis. You can change the
basic offset in this window if necessary.

ZO 1 ... ZO n Enter the following in this window:


• The values of current zero offsets "ZO 1 ... ZO n" (for n= 4...100)
for each axis and
• the rotation with which a coordinate system is rotated about an
axis.

DRF The generated handwheel offsets for each axis are displayed here.

Program The active values of the selected programmable zero offset are
displayed here. They cannot be altered.

Scale The active scale factor for the relevant axis is displayed here. They
cannot be altered.

Mirror Displays axis in relation to which mirroring is performed.

Total The sum of all active settable and programmable offsets is displayed
here. They cannot be altered.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-92 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Operation
2 2.11 Zero offsets 2
2.11.3 Select/deselect settable zero offset in Manual area

Operating sequence

Select with softkey Machine T, S, M...


Manual

The following window is displayed.

Select a zero offset

Position the cursor on parameter "Zero offset" and use softkey


"Alternat." to set the zero offset you require.

When you press the "NC Start" key, the zero offset you have selected
will be activated.

The active zero offset is also displayed in the "WCS" window.


e.g. ZO1

The offset values programmed in the "Zero offset" menu are also
taken into account in the tool coordinate system display WCS.

Deselect a zero offset

Place the cursor on the "Zero offset" parameter and set the field to "–"
using the "Alternat." softkey.

When you press the "NC Start" key, the set active zero offset will be
deselected again.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 2-93
Operation 08.00
2 2.12 Switch to CNC operation 2

2.12 Switch to CNC operation


CNC ISO You can switch from the ShopMill interface to the CNC standard
operator interface of the SINUMERIK 840D or 810D system by
pressing softkey "CNC ISO".

Softkey "CNC ISO" will work only if the machine manufacturer has
implemented the function internally via the PLC interface.
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!

If softkey "CNC ISO" is active, the following basic display of the CNC
standard operator interface appears on your screen:

ShopMill If you wish to return to the ShopMill operator interface, press softkey
"ShopMill"."

Further notes If you are working in the CNC standard operator interface, please read
the User Documentation for the SINUMERIK 840D/810D system (see
Appendix, List of References).

2.13 Remote diagnosis

Function

The control system can be operated from an external PC by means of


a remote diagnostic function. You can use a modem to link the control
system and the external PC.

Remote The remote diagnostic function is activated on the CNC standard


diagnosis
operator interface in the Diagnosis operating area.

Remote Diagnosis is an option.

For further information about remote diagnosis, please refer to


document /FB/, Description of Functions, Extension Functions, F3.
n

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


2-94 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3
Programming with ShopMill

3.1 Fundamental programming principles ...................................................................... 3-97

3.2 Program structure ................................................................................................... 3-100


3.2.1 Screen window in program ..................................................................................... 3-101
3.2.2 Toggle between screen windows............................................................................ 3-102

3.3 Create a ShopMill program ..................................................................................... 3-103


3.3.1 Create a new program; define a blank.................................................................... 3-103
3.3.2 Program new blocks ............................................................................................... 3-106
3.3.3 Edit program blocks (change, delete, move, copy, paste)...................................... 3-108

3.4 Program the tool, offset value and spindle speed................................................... 3-110

3.5 Contour milling ........................................................................................................ 3-111


3.5.1 Free contour programming ..................................................................................... 3-112
3.5.2 Description of softkeys for free contour programming function .............................. 3-115
3.5.3 Description of parameters for line/circle contour elements..................................... 3-117
3.5.4 Programming examples for freely defined contours ............................................... 3-118
3.5.5 Path milling of open and closed contours ............................................................... 3-120
3.5.6 Rough drilling in contour pockets............................................................................ 3-123
3.5.7 Machine (rough cut) pocket with islands................................................................. 3-126
3.5.8 Remove residual material ....................................................................................... 3-127
3.5.9 Finish pocket with islands ....................................................................................... 3-129

3.6 Programing simple path motions ............................................................................ 3-131


3.6.1 Line ......................................................................................................................... 3-131
3.6.2 Circle with known center point ................................................................................ 3-133
3.6.3 Circle with known radius ......................................................................................... 3-134
3.6.4 Helix ........................................................................................................................ 3-135
3.6.5 Polar coordinates .................................................................................................... 3-136
3.6.6 Polar line ................................................................................................................. 3-137
3.6.7 Polar circle .............................................................................................................. 3-138
3.6.8 Programming examples for polar coordinates........................................................ 3-139

3.7 Drilling ..................................................................................................................... 3-140


3.7.1 Centering ................................................................................................................ 3-141
3.7.2 Drilling and reaming ................................................................................................ 3-142
3.7.3 Deep-hole drilling .................................................................................................... 3-143
3.7.4 Boring...................................................................................................................... 3-145
3.7.5 Tapping ................................................................................................................... 3-146
3.7.6 Thread cutting ......................................................................................................... 3-147
3.7.7 Position on freely programmable positions and position patterns .......................... 3-150
3.7.8 Freely programmable positions .............................................................................. 3-151
3.7.9 Line position pattern................................................................................................ 3-152
3.7.10 Matrix position pattern............................................................................................. 3-153
3.7.11 Full circle position pattern ....................................................................................... 3-154
3.7.12 Pitch circle position pattern ..................................................................................... 3-156
3.7.13 Obstacle.................................................................................................................. 3-157
3.7.14 Repeat positions ..................................................................................................... 3-158

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-95
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3
3.7.15 Programming examples for drilling ......................................................................... 3-159

3.8 Milling ...................................................................................................................... 3-161


3.8.1 Face milling ............................................................................................................. 3-161
3.8.2 Mill a rectangular pocket ......................................................................................... 3-164
3.8.3 Mill a circular pocket................................................................................................ 3-167
3.8.4 Mill rectangular spigots ........................................................................................... 3-169
3.8.5 Mill circular spigots.................................................................................................. 3-171
3.8.6 Mill longitudinal slots ............................................................................................... 3-173
3.8.7 Mill circumferential slots on a full or pitch circle ...................................................... 3-175
3.8.8 Use of position patterns for milling.......................................................................... 3-177

3.9 Measurements ........................................................................................................ 3-180


3.9.1 Workpiece zero point .............................................................................................. 3-180
3.9.2 Measure tool ........................................................................................................... 3-182

3.10 Miscellaneous functions .......................................................................................... 3-183


3.10.1 Subroutines and program section repeats .............................................................. 3-183
3.10.2 Alter the safety clearance or return plane ............................................................... 3-184
3.10.3 Zero offsets ............................................................................................................. 3-185
3.10.4 Cylinder peripheral surface transformation ............................................................. 3-191
3.10.5 Swiveling ................................................................................................................. 3-194
3.10.6 Define a new blank.................................................................................................. 3-199

3.11 Insert G code in a ShopMill program....................................................................... 3-200

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-96 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.1 Fundamental programming principles 3

3.1 Fundamental programming principles

Important! Please pay particular attention to the following fundamental


principles when writing programs for your machine tool!

Axes The 3 main axes on milling machines are designated as X, Y and Z.


Axis Z is normally the tool axis.

Metric or inch The control system can process both metric and inch dimensions.
unit of measurement Depending on the basic setting you choose, the control interprets all
geometric values as either metric or inch dimensions.
Irrespective of the basic setting, you can set metric or inch dimensions
in the program header (define blank).
All dimensions stated in this section are metric.

Absolute dimensioning With the absolute dimensioning method, dimensions refer to the zero
point of the coordinate system of the total offset.

Incremental dimensioning With the incremental dimensioning method, the programmed


positional numerical value corresponds to the path to be traversed.
The direction of travel is determined by the sign.

Tool T A tool must be programmed for every cutting operation. With the
ShopMill machining cycles, a tool selection is already integrated in
every parameterization screenform. Exception: You must select a tool
before programming simple straight lines and circles.

Tool selections are modal, i.e. if the same tool is used in a succession
of machining cycles, it only needs to be programmed in the first cycle.

Tool length compensation Tool length compensations take effect immediately the tool is loaded
into the spindle. Two different tool offset blocks (D1/D2) can be
assigned to each tool with 2 edges.
The tool length compensation of the spindle tool remains active even
after the program has been executed (RESET).

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-97
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.1 Fundamental programming principles 3
Tool radius compensation The tool radius compensation is automatically included in the cycles
except for path milling. You can machine with or without radius
compensation in conjunction with the "Path milling" and "Line"
functions. In the case of the "Line" function, the tool radius
compensation has a modal action, i.e. it is not automatically
deactivated again.

Radius compensation left of contour

Radius compensation right of contour

Radius compensation off


Radius compensation is retained
as set

Spindle speed The spindle speed (S) determines the number of spindle rotations per
minute. The CW/CCW setting is made in the tool list in ShopMill.
Programming:
The spindle speed is input when a new tool is loaded into the spindle.
As an alternative to spindle speed, a cutting rate (V) can be specified
in m/min.
Spindle start/spindle stop:
The spindle is started directly after a new tool has been loaded. It is
stopped on Reset, end of program or tool change.

Cutting rate Peripheral speed at which the tool cutting edge machines the
workpiece. Cutting rates (V) are specified in m/min.

Cutting rate

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-98 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.1 Fundamental programming principles 3
Traverse at rapid rate The programmed path is traversed along a straight line at the fastest
possible velocity without the workpiece being machined. Rapid
traverse is a non-modal command, i.e. if you want the axis to traverse
rapidly in the next block, then you must enter "Rapid traverse" as
feedrate (F) again.
If you do not program a feedrate or rapid traverse, the axis is
automatically traversed at the last programmed feed value (machining
feedrate).

Traverse at feedrate The tool travels at the programmed feedrate F along a straight line or
(machining feedrate) on a circle to the programmed end point and then machines the
workpiece. Machining feedrates (F) are specified in mm/min, mm/rev
or mm/tooth.

Feedrate in mm/tooth
Mills are multi-edged tools. For this reason, a value must be found
which guarantees that each cutting edge can machine the workpiece
under the best possible conditions. Feed per tooth corresponds to the
linear path traversed by the mill when a tooth is engaged. Feed per
tooth is also the effective distance covered by the table feed between
the engagement of two successive cutting edges.

Feedrate in mm/tooth

The machining feedrate is modal, i.e. even if the machining process


changes, you need not enter a new feedrate if the feedrate
programmed in the preceding block is still appropriate. This applies
even if you have programmed a rapid traverse command in between.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-99
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.2 Program structure 3

3.2 Program structure


The program is divided into 3 subsections:
Program header, program blocks and program end.
These subsections form a machining plan.

Program structure

Program header The program header contains the dimensions of the blank and
parameters which are effective throughout the program, e.g.
• dimension in mm or inches
• tool axis X, Y or Z
• return plane, safety clearance, machining direction

Program blocks To obtain a finished part, you must first program the various
machining operations, travel motions, machine commands, etc. The
program blocks represent this program.

Chained machining The control automatically chains the technology and position blocks.
These blocks are identified by a square bracket immediately beside
the machining symbol. The brackets are inserted from the beginning
to the end of the sequence of chained blocks.

Blocks N10 ... N25 are chained

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-100 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.2 Program structure 3

3.2.1 Screen window in program

Machining plan

View of a programmed machining plan

Programming graphic

View of a programming graphic

Parameter input window


with programming graphic

Programming graphic with open parameter window

Parameter input window


with Help display

Help display for parameter inputs

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-101
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.2 Program structure 3
Explanation of color symbols in the Help displays:
Yellow circle = reference point
Red arrow = tool traversing rapidly
Green arrow = tool traversing at machining feedrate

3.2.2 Toggle between screen windows

You can use the Info key to toggle between the displayed
Key screen windows, i.e.
• from the machining plan to the programming graphic and
back and
• to select and deselect a Help display when parameter
windows are open.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-102 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.3 Create a ShopMill program 3

3.3 Create a ShopMill program

3.3.1 Create a new program; define a blank

New programs are set up in the "Program Manager" area.

Select with softkeys Program Programs New ShopMill


Manager > Program

Enter a program name Enter a program name.


Program names may be a maximum of 24 characters in length. You
can use any letters, digits or the underscore symbol (_). ShopMill
automatically changes lower case to upper case.

Confirm the program name by pressing

softkey or with the "Input" key .

The screenform for setting the "Program header" parameters then


appears.

Parameterize the program


header

Set the program header parameters

Parameter settings in the program header are valid throughout the


entire program.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-103
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.3 Create a ShopMill program 3

Parameters for input of a • Workpiece corner point 1 (X0, Y0, Z0):


blank Workpiece corner point 1 is the reference point for the blank
dimensions. It must be entered as an absolute value.
• Workpiece corner point 2 or dimensions
(X1, Y1, Z1 or L, W, H):
Workpiece corner point 2 is opposite workpiece corner point 1.
It must be entered as an absolute value. The deviations are the
length, width and height of the blank.

Workpiece corner points 1 and 2 Workpiece corner point 1 and


deviations

• Definition of unit of measurement of program [mm or inch].


• Tool axis: The tool length is calculated in the set axis.
• Return plane (RP and safety clearance (SC):
Planes above workpiece. )
During machining the tool travels in rapid traverse from the tool
change point to the return plan and then to the safety clearance.
The machining feedrate is activated at this level. When the
machining operation is finished, the tool travels at machining
feedrate away from the workpiece onto the safety clearance
level. It travels from the safety clearance to the return plane and
then to the tool change point in rapid traverse.
The return plane is entered as an absolute value.
The safety clearance must be entered as an incremental value
(without sign).

Return plane (RP) and safety clearance (SC)

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-104 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.3 Create a ShopMill program 3

Return plane (RP)

Safety
clearance (SC)
Z

X
Safety clearance for varying workpiece heights

• Machining direction:
When machining a pocket, a longitudinal groove or a spigot,
ShopMill applies the machining direction (climb or conventional)
and the spindle rotation entered in the tool list. The pocket is
then machined in a clockwise or counter-clockwise direction.

Climb milling

Conventional milling

Machining pockets in climb or conventional milling operation with CW spindle


rotation

• Retraction with position patterns:


When working with optimized retraction, the tool travels in
relation to the contour across the workpiece at machining feedrate
and safety clearance (SC). On retraction to RP, the tool is retracted
to the return plane when the machining step is complete and
infeeds at the new position. Collisions with workpiece obstacles are
thus prevented when the tool is retracted and fed in, e.g. when
holes in pockets or grooves are machined at different levels and
positions.

Optimized retraction Retraction to return plane RP

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-105
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.3 Create a ShopMill program 3
Store parameters
Select with softkey
The parameters you have entered are stored. The machining plan is
then displayed. You can now program further machining operations.

3.3.2 Program new blocks

Create program blocks Once you have defined the blank, you can define machining
operations, feedrates and positions in individual program blocks.
You will be supported by "Help" displays for individual machining
operations.

Note New programming blocks are always inserted after the selected
block. You cannot program blocks before the program header or after
program end.

Parameter input fields


Feedrate:
If you do not program a value for feedrate (F) (empty field), the system
uses the last programmed feedrate.

Clear an input field:


Use the DEL key (or Backspace key) to clear an input field, i.e. to
delete the programmed value.

Preset (default) or empty parameter fields :


You must always enter a value in fields with a preset default. If you
clear a default field, softkey "Accept" disappears from the display!

"Alternat." softkey and toggle key:


If the cursor is positioned on an input field with various setting options,
softkey "Alternat." is automatically displayed on the vertical softkey bar
(see softkey "Alternat." in Section "Important softkeys for operation
and programming").
Roughing/finishing:
Every cycle can be programmed with roughing or finishing. If you wish
to rough cut the workpiece first and then finish cut it, you must call the
cycle a second time. The programmed values do not change if you call
the cycle again.
Some cycles offer roughing and finishing as a complete machining
operation, i.e. you need only call the cycle once.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-106 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.3 Create a ShopMill program 3
Approach a cycle • Approach the programmed cycles with ShopMill
− Tool is above the return plane (RP) :
The tool is positioned in rapid traverse in the X/Y plane and then
in the Z direction to the return plane (RP)

Tool change point

Return
plane (RP)

Safety
Z clearance (SC)

X Rapid traverse
Machining feedrate

Approach a cycle above the return plane

− or tool is below the return plane (RP) :


The tool is positioned in rapid traverse first in the Z direction to
the return plane (RP) and then in rapid traverse in the X/Y plane

Return
plane (RP)
Tool change
point

Safety
Z clearance (SC)

X Rapid traverse
Machining feedrate

Approach a cycle below the return plane

• Tool axis travels in rapid traverse to safety clearance (SC)


• The cycle is then processed at the programmed machining
feedrate
• On completion of machining, the tool travels to the cycle center in
the X/Y plane at machining feedrate and then moves away from the
workpiece with the tool axis until it reaches safety clearance
• The tool axis then retracts to the return plane in rapid traverse
• The tool change point is approached from the return plane in rapid
traverse

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-107
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.3 Create a ShopMill program 3

3.3.3 Edit program blocks (change, delete, move, copy, paste)

Function

Change a program block Program blocks generated with the ShopMill programming syntax can
be reconverted to the corresponding ShopMill interactive screenforms
again.
When you select a block with the cursor keys, an "Open" key appears
in the block.

Change a program block

When you select the key on the operator panel, the interactive
screenform of the selected program block is opened. You can now
change the cycle parameters.

Transfer the changes to the program by selecting the key.

Edit a program block You can use the extended program block editor to delete, copy and
paste program blocks. You can also sort block numbers in ascending
order.

Select with key "etc." >

Use the cursor keys to select the block to be edited. Then press the
appropriate softkey, e.g. Copy.
Cut
Delete a program block

Copy Insert
Copy and paste a program block

Cut Insert
Move a program block

The program block to be inserted is always pasted in after the marked


(selected) program block.

Edit more than one Use the arrow keys to select the first or last program block to be edited
program block and then press softkey "Mark". Then select the remaining blocks to be
edited using the cursor keys.

Mark Cut
Delete program blocks

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-108 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.3 Create a ShopMill program 3

Mark Copy Insert


Copy and paste program blocks

Mark Cut Insert


Move program blocks

Copy program blocks to • First copy the blocks that you want to paste to another program
another program (see "Mark, copy blocks").
• Then open the program into which you want to paste them and
select the extended program editor:
Program Programs
Manager >
• Use the cursor keys to select the block under which you wish to
insert the previously copied blocks and then press softkey "Paste".

Find You can set the following search criteria:


• Find block number
• Find text (e.g. straight line, drill, X=50, etc.)
• Search from program beginning (default) or search from current
cursor position. The option is selected with the toggle key.

Search
Select with softkey >

Example Find block number 10


Search
• Press >

• Enter the value "10"

• Press

Find Next You can continue the search by selecting the "Find next" key.

Find
Select with softkey next

Number blocks in If you paste a new or copied program block in between two existing
ascending sequence program blocks, ShopMill automatically generates a new block
number. This number might be higher than the block number in the
next block.
You can sort the block numbers in ascending sequence again by
pressing softkey "Renumber".

Renumber
Select with softkey:

Exit the extended program


editor You can exit the extended program editor by selecting softkey

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-109
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.4 Program the tool, offset value and spindle speed 3

3.4 Program the tool, offset value and spindle speed

General When you program cycles, you will find the tool displayed in the
screenform. When you program a line or a circular arc, you will have
to select a tool beforehand.

Straight Tool
Select with softkeys: Circle

Programming Select parameter field "T". ShopMill allows you to enter tools in several
a tool different ways:
1. Possibility: Enter the name or number of a tool via the keyboard.
2. Possibility: Press area key "Tool, offset", select a tool with
the cursor keys and select softkey
to
program .
The tool is transferred to the parameter field.

Offset value (D1/D2) You can select whether to apply offset value D1 or D2 for each
programmed tool. The tool offsets are stored in the tool list.
You must program D1 and D2 for certain tools (counterbore with
spigot, stepped drill, etc.) to avoid risk of collisions (see also Sections
"Programming examples for drilling" and "Tools and tool offsets").

Spindle speed (S) or In ShopMill you can program either the spindle speed (S) or the cutting
cutting rate (V) rate (V). You can toggle between them using the "Alternat." key.
• Spindle speed and cutting rate remain valid until you program a
new tool.
• Spindle speeds are programmed in rev/min.
• Cutting rates are programmed in m/min
• You can set the direction of rotation of a tool in the tool list.

Allowance (DR) You can program an allowance on the tool radius in this parameter
input field. A finishing allowance is then left when the contour is
machined (see also Section "Tools and tool offsets").

Example You want to leave a finishing allowance of 0.5 mm on a contour. DR


must then be programmed with 0.5 mm.
With a setting of DR=0, the programmed contour is cut without a
finishing allowance.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-110 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.5 Contour milling 3

3.5 Contour milling


Function

You can program the following machining operations using the contour
milling cycles.

Free contour programming When programming a freely defined contour, you can input a contour
and assign it a contour name. The geometry processor integrated in
ShopMill offers the following functions:
• Input of contours with up to 99 elements (including transition
elements chamfer and radius). At least two elements create a
defined contour.
• Input of incompletely dimensioned elements
• Addition of chamfers and radii (transition elements)
• Tangential transitions
New
Select with softkeys contour >

Path milling Path milling is a machining cycle with which you can machine open
and closed contours. The most important functions are:
• Approach and retract strategies
• Finishing allowances for XY plane and Z direction (tool axis)
• Cut segmentation in Z direction (tool axis)
Path
Select with softkey milling >

Rough-drilling The rough-drilling function can be used on contour pockets before


they are removed. The machining cycle comprises a centering cycle
and the actual rough-drilling cycle.
Rough-
Select with softkey drilling >

Remove pocket with This is a cycle that can machine pockets with or without islands. The
islands pocket and island contours are programmed as a freely defined
contour. The cycle offers the following functions:
• Definition of insertion strategy
• Finishing allowances for XY plane and Z direction (tool axis)
• Cut segmentation in Z direction (tool axis)
Residual
Select with softkey material >

Remove residual material This cycle allows residual material to be removed with a small cutter. It
can be useful in cases where the use of a tool with a large diameter
has left residual material along the contour, for example, in corners.
Residual
Select with softkeys: material >

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-111
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.5 Contour milling 3
Finish a pocket This cycle can be used to finish cut the base of a pocket or the pocket
with island and island contours.
Remove
Select with softkeys: >

3.5.1 Free contour programming

Function

You can create simple or complex contours and then machine them
with "Path milling" or "Solid machining" cycles.
An integrated geometry processor calculates any parameters that are
missing provided that it can derive them from other parameters.

The programmed contours are stored at the end of the current


program.

Program a new contour and Contour New


define the starting point Select with softkeys milling contour >

Enter a contour name. This must be a unique name.

You can also copy contours to other programs.

When entering a contour, start at a position you know and enter this
as the starting point. Then define the tool axis. If you alter the tool axis,
ShopMill will automatically alter the associated starting point axes.

The starting point is stored with softkey .

Transfer the contour to Transfer the programmed contour to the machining plan by pressing
the machining plan softkey "Accept". You can then machine the contour using the
machining cycles.

Free contour Beginning at the starting point, enter the first contour element, e.g.
programming straight line. Enter all data specified in the workshop drawing: Length
of line, end position, transition to next element, angle of lead, etc.
By pressing softkey "All param.", you can display additional parameter
input fields for the contour element.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-112 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.5 Contour milling 3
If you do not enter values in some parameter input fields, ShopMill
assumes that you do not know what the settings should be and tries to
calculate the settings from other parameters.

Additional commands You can enter any additional commands in the form of G code for
each contour element. Additional commands (max. 40 characters) are
entered in the Start form and under softkey "All param." for individual
contour elements.
For example, you can program deceleration and exact stop for circular
contour element "G9".

When a contour is "path milled", it is always machined in the


programmed direction. By programming the contour in a clockwise or
counter-clockwise direction, you can determine whether the contour is
machined in a synchronized operation or reverse rotation operation
(see following table).

Outside contour
Desired CW spindle rotation CCW spindle rotation
machining direction
Synchronized operation Programmed in clockwise direction Programmed in counter-clockwise
Cutter radius compensation CCW direction, cutter radius comp. CW
Reverse rotation Programmed in counter-clockwise Programmed in clockwise direction
direction, cutter radius comp. CW Cutter radius compensation CCW

Inside contour:
Desired CW spindle rotation CCW spindle rotation
machining direction
Synchronized operation Programmed in counter-clockwise Programming in clockwise direction
direction, cutter radius comp. CCW Cutter radius compensation CW
Reverse rotation Programming in clockwise direction Programmed in counter-clockwise
Cutter radius compensation CW direction, cutter radius comp. CCW

Contours as pockets Contours for pockets or islands must be closed, i.e. the starting and
or islands end points of the contour are identical.

Transition element You can use a transition element whenever there is an intersection
Chamfer/radius between two successive elements which can be calculated from input
values. Otherwise you must use a line or circle contour element.

Transition element in In a closed contour, you can program a transition element from the
closed contours last to the first element in the contour. The contour starting point lies
outside the contour after you have programmed the transition.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-113
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.5 Contour milling 3
Parameters with gray These parameters have been calculated by ShopMill and cannot be
background altered by the user.
When you alter the programmable parameter input fields (white
background), the control calculates new data which are then
immediately displayed again in the input form.

Input value is already If you over-define a contour, ShopMill may automatically calculate a
calculated value that you would normally be required to input yourself.
This may cause problems if the input value calculated by the control
does not tally with the workshop drawing. If this is the case, you must
delete the values from which the control is deriving the incorrect input
value. You can then enter the exact setting from the workshop
drawing.

Programming graphic The contour you have programmed is displayed in the programming
graphic. Contour elements can be displayed in different line styles and
colors:
• Black: Programmed contour
• Red: Current contour element
• Yellow: Alternative element
• Continuous line: Fully defined element
• Dotted line: Partially defined element
• Dashed line: Alternative element

The programming graphic displays as much of the contour as the


control can interpret on the basis of parameter inputs. If your contour
is not displayed in the programming graphic, then you need to enter
more data. Check the contour elements you have already
programmed if necessary. You may have omitted to enter settings
which you know.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-114 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.5 Contour milling 3

3.5.2 Description of softkeys for free contour programming function

Vertical line

Horizontal line

Diagonal line

Circle / Arc
Cylinder peripheral surface When the "Cylinder peripheral surface transformation" function is
transformation active, the lengths (in circumferential direction of cylinder peripheral
surface) of contours can be defined on a cylinder in the form of
angular measurements. Depending on the selected axis (in a display
machine data), the start form and forms for contour elements display
the input in degrees for Xα, Iα or for Yα, Jα (see also Section
"Cylinder peripheral surface transformation").

Please read the machine tool manufacturer’s instruction manual!

Tangent to preceding The contour element has a tangential transition to the preceding
element element, thereby setting the angle to the preceding element (α2) to
0 degrees. The status "tangential" appears in the input field of
parameter α2.
Tangent to
Select with softkeys: prec. elem.

Additional parameter If your drawing contains other data (dimensions) for an element, you
displays can display further input options by pressing softkey "All param.".
All
Select with softkeys: param.

Descriptions of individual parameters can be found in Section


"Description of contour element parameters".

Select a dialog If your contour involves parameter constellations which permit more
than one contour characteristic, the system will request you to select a
dialog. Make the correct selection (continuous black line) using softkey
"Alternat." and confirm with softkey "Accept".
Dialog Accept
Select with softkeys: selection dialog

Alter the selected If you wish to alter your selected dialog, you must select the contour
dialog element for which the dialog selection was made.
When you press softkey "Change selection", both dialog alternatives
are displayed again. Make the selection again.
Change Dialog Accept
Select with softkeys: selection selection dialog

If the selection has been made implicitly from other input values, the
system will not request you to make a selection.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-115
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.5 Contour milling 3
Clear a parameter input You can clear the programmed value again with the DEL key.
field

Store a contour element If you have set all necessary parameters for a contour element or
selected the required contour with softkey "Dialog select", store the
contour element by pressing softkey "Accept".

Select with softkeys:

You can now program the next contour element.

Change a contour element Select the programmed contour element that you wish to alter with the
cursor keys. Press the "Input" key to display a parameter screenform
showing the magnified contour element. You can now change the
element parameters and then save them.

Delete a contour element Select the contour element you wish to delete with the cursor keys.
The selected contour symbol and appropriate contour element in the
programming graphic are highlighted in red. Then press softkeys
"Delete element" and "OK".
Delete
Select with softkeys: element

Close the contour When you press softkey "Close contour", ShopMill inserts a straight
line between your current position and the starting point, thus closing
the contour.
Close
Select with softkeys: contour
Close and store Once you have closed the contour, press softkey "Accept" to exit from
a contour free contour programming mode. The programmed contour is
transferred to the machining plan at the same time.

Select with softkeys:

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-116 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.5 Contour milling 3

3.5.3 Description of parameters for line/circle contour elements

Parameters Description of "Straight line" contour element Unit

X absolute Absolute end position in X direction mm


X incremental Incremental end position in X direction mm
Y absolute Absolute end position in Y direction
Y incremental Incremental end position in Y direction
L Length of line mm
α1 Lead angle in relation to X axis Degrees
α2 Angle to preceding element, tangential transition: α2=0 Degrees
Transition to Transition element to next contour is a chamfer (FS) mm
following Transition element to next contour is a radius (R) mm
element FS=0 or R=0 means no transition element.
Additional Any additional command in G code form
command

Parameters Description of "Circle" contour element Unit

X absolute Absolute end position in X direction mm


X incremental Incremental end position in X direction mm
Y absolute Absolute end position in Y direction
Y incremental Incremental end position in Y direction
α1 Start angle in relation to X axis Degrees
α2 Angle to preceding element, tangential transition: α2=0 Degrees
β1 End angle in relation to X axis Degrees
β2 Arc angle of circle Degrees
Direction of in clockwise or counter-clockwise direction
rotation
R Radius of circle mm
I Position of arc center point in X direction (abs. or incr.) mm
J Position of arc center point in Y direction (abs. or incr.) mm
Transition to Transition element to next contour is a chamfer (FS) mm
following Transition element to next contour is a radius (R) mm
element FS=0 or R=0 means no transition element.
Additional Any additional command in G code form
command

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-117
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.5 Contour milling 3

3.5.4 Programming examples for freely defined contours

Example 1 Starting point: X=0 abs., Y=5.7 abs.


The contour is programmed in a CW direction using dialog selection.

R9
60 °

.5
Start point

15.2
X=0, Y=5.7
R2

R2

4.65
4.65
.2
R3
R2

14.8
Y

22 °

5 11.5

Workshop drawing of contour

Element Input Comment


CCW rotation, R=9.5, I=0 abs., make dialog selection,
transition to following element: R=2
α1=−30 degrees Note the angle in the Help
display!
CW rotation, tangent prev. elem.,
R=2, J=4.65 abs.
CCW rotation, tangent prev. elem.
R=3.2, I=11.5 abs., J=0 abs., make dialog selection,
make dialog selection
CW rotation, tangent prev. elem.
R=2, J=−4.65 abs., make dialog selection
Tangent to prev. elem. Note the angle in the Help
Y=−14.8 abs., α1=−158 degrees display!
All parameters, L=5, make dialog selection

Y=5.7 abs.

X=0 abs.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-118 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.5 Contour milling 3
Example 2 Starting point: X=0 abs., Y=0 abs.
The contour is programmed in a CW direction using dialog selection. It is
advisable to display all parameters for this contour by selecting the "All
param." softkey.

Starting point
X=0, Y=0

R25

R5
Y R7.5

30 °

X
Workshop drawing of contour

Element Input Comment


Y=−104 abs.

CW rotation, R=79, I=0 abs., make dialog selection,


all parameters, β2=30 degrees
CW rotation, tangent prev. elem.
R=7.5, all parameters, β2=180 degrees
CCW rotation, R=64, X=−6 abs., I=0 abs.,
make dialog selection, make dialog selection
Transition to following element: R=5
All parameters, α1=90 degrees, Note the angle in the Help
Transition to following element: R=5 display!
CW rotation, R=25, X=0 abs., Y=0 abs. I=0 abs.,
make dialog selection, make dialog selection

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-119
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.5 Contour milling 3
Example 3 Starting point: X=5.67 abs., Y=0 abs.
The contour is programmed in a counter-clockwise direction.

X= - 137.257 abs.
43.972
Starting point
X=5.67 Y=0

125 °

Y R72

Workshop drawing of contour

Element Input Comment


All parameters, α1=180 degrees, Note the angle in the Help display!

X=−43.972 inc, all parameters Coordinate X in "abs" and in "inc"


X=−137.257 abs, α1=−125 degrees Note the angle in the Help display!
X=43.972 inc Coordinate X in "abs" and in "inc"
α1=−55 degrees Note the angle in the Help display!
X=5.67 abs

CW rotation, R=72, X=5.67 abs., Y=0 abs.,


make dialog selection

3.5.5 Path milling of open and closed contours

Function

You can mill along any contour you have programmed with the "Path
milling" function. The function operates with cutter radius
compensation.
The contour does not have to be closed. You can perform any of the
following operations:
• Inside or outside machining (on left or right of the contour).
• Machining along center-point path

Select with softkeys Contour Path


milling milling >

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-120 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.5 Contour milling 3
Path milling on right or left A programmed contour can be machined with the cutter radius on the
of the contour right or left. You can also select various modes and strategies of
approach and retraction from the contour.

Approach/retraction mode The tool can approach or retract from the contour along a quadrant,
semi-circle or straight line.
• With a quadrant or semi-circle approach path, you must enter the
current center point path.
• With a straight line, you must specify the distance between the
cutter outer edge and the contour start or end point.
You can also program a mixture of modes, e.g. approach along
quadrant, retract along semi-circle.

L1/L2

R1/R2 R1/R2

Approach and retraction along straight line, quadrant and semi-circle;


(L1=approach length, L2=retract length, R1=approach radius, R2=retract radius)

Approach/retraction strategy You can choose between planar approach/retraction and spatial
approach/retraction:

• Planar approach: The tool first approaches in the Z direction


(machining depth) and then in the XY plane.
• Spatial approach: The tool approaches in depth
and plane simultaneously.

• Retraction takes place in the opposite order.


You can program a mixture of strategies, e.g. planar approach,
spatial retraction.

Path milling along the A programmed contour can also be machined along the center-point
center-point path path if the operation has been activated under radius compensation

(no radius compensation). In this instance, the tool can approach


and retract only along a straight line since the control cannot
determine which side the contour must be approached from.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-121
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.5 Contour milling 3

L1/L2

Approach and retraction in a straight line on center-point path (L1=approach length,


L2=retraction length)

Parameters Description Unit

T, F, S, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".

Radius Machining on left of contour


compensation
Machining on right of contour

Machining along center-point path


Machining type Roughing
Finishing
Z0 Reference plane (abs. or incr.)
Z1 Final depth (abs. or incr.) mm
DZ Infeed depth mm
UZ Finishing allowance on base mm
UXY Finishing allowance on edge (not applicable to center-point path machining mm
operations)
Approach along a quadrant (segment of a helix) *)
mode along a semi-circle (segment of a helix) *)
along a straight line (oblique line in space)

Approach planar
strategy
spatial
R1 or L1 Approach radius *), approach length
Retraction along a quadrant (segment of a helix) *)
mode along a semi-circle (segment of a helix) *)
along a straight line (oblique line in space)

Retraction planar
strategy
spatial
R2 or L2 Retraction radius *), retraction length
Select lift-off Z0 + safety clearance
mode By safety clearance
To return plane
No retraction

*) applies only to path milling on left and right of contour

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-122 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.5 Contour milling 3
3.5.6 Rough drilling in contour pockets

Function

When solid machining contour pockets with vertical plunging, rough


drilling is often performed first to avoid having to use end milling
cutters that mill across the center.
The number and positions of the required rough drill holes depends on
certain conditions, e.g. type of contour, tool, plane infeed, finishing
allowances. To avoid unnecessary tool changes, it is best to rough drill
all pockets first. It is important to ensure that the rough drilling
operation (centering and rough drilling) is programmed in the same
machining sequence as the contours and solid machining.

To do this, you must call a special rough drilling cycle, consisting of a


centering cycle and the rough drilling cycle itself.
The drilling positions in the contour pocket cycle are determined when
the contour pocket is calculated. This calculation generates a special
drilling program that is called in the rough drilling cycles (centering and
rough drilling).

Contour pocket
Contour island
Rough drilling/centering contour pocket
Rough drilling/rough drilling contour pocket
Solid machining, roughing
Residual material
Solid machining, finishing plane
Solid machining, finishing depth

Example of a chain containing rough drilling (centering and rough drilling) and solid
machining

All para- You can select softkey "All parameters" to extend each screenform for
meters
the purpose of entering additional parameters. If you do not enter any
values, the parameter settings for Solid Machining (roughing) are used
instead.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-123
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.5 Contour milling 3
Centering

Select with softkey Contour Rough- Centering


milling drilling >

Select key
to call Help display

Centering in contour pocket

Parameters Description Unit

T, F, S See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".


TR Reference tool for centering
Z0 Workpiece height (abs.) mm
Z1 Depth in relation to Z0 (incr.) mm
DXY Max. infeed plane mm
Alternatively, you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as the ratio --> plane infeed
(mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm). %
UXY Finishing allowance, plane mm
Select lift-off Liftoff mode before new infeed
mode If a machining operation requires several insertion points, you can program the
retraction height: mm
• To return plane mm
• Z0 + safety clearance
On making the transition to the next insertion point, the tool returns to this height. If
there are no elements larger than Z0 in the pocket area, "Z0 + safety clearance" can
be selected as the lift-off mode.

Rough-drilling

Select with softkey Contour Rough Rough-


milling drilling > drilling

Select key
to call Help display

Rough-drilling a contour pocket

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-124 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.5 Contour milling 3
Parameters Description Unit

T, F, S See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".


TR Reference tool for rough-drilling
Z0 Workpiece height (abs.) mm
Z1 Depth in relation to Z0 (incr.) mm
DXY Max. infeed plane mm
Alternatively, you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as the ratio --> plane infeed
(mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm). %
UXY Finishing allowance, plane mm
UZ Finishing allowance, depth mm
Select lift-off Liftoff mode before new infeed
mode, If a machining operation requires several insertion points, you can program the
retraction height: mm
• To return plane mm
• Z0 + safety clearance
On making the transition to the next insertion point, the tool returns to this height. If
there are no elements larger than Z0 in the pocket area, "Z0 + safety clearance" can
be selected as the lift-off mode.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-125
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.5 Contour milling 3
3.5.7 Machine (rough cut) pocket with islands

Function

Before you can machine a pocket with islands, you must enter the
contour of the pocket and islands (see Section "Free contour
programming"). The first contour you specify is interpreted as the
pocket contour and all the others as islands.

Using the programmed contours and the input screen form for solid
machining, ShopMill generates a program which removes the pockets
with islands from inside to outside in parallel to the contour.

The islands may lie partially outside the pocket or overlap one another.

Select with softkeys Contour Remove


milling >

Select key
to call Help display

Help displays for solid machining

Parameters Description Unit

T, F, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".


Machining type Roughing mm
Z0 Workpiece height (abs.) mm
Z1 Depth in relation to Z0 (abs. or incr.) mm
DXY Max. infeed in X/Y plane. mm
Alternatively, you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as a ratio Å plane infeed
(mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm). %
DZ Max. infeed depth (abs. or incr.) mm
UXY Finishing allowance, plane mm
ZU Finishing allowance, depth mm
Starting point The start point can be calculated automatically or entered manually.
X Start point X (abs.), manual input only mm
Y Start point Y (abs.), manual input only mm

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-126 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.5 Contour milling 3
Insertion Pe = oscillating: The tool is inserted in oscillating mode at the programmed
angle (EW).
He = Helical: The tool is inserted along a helical path with the
programmed radius (ER) and programmed pitch (EP).
Mi = Center: This insertion strategy requires a cutter which cuts across
center. It is inserted at the programmed feedrate (FZ).
EW Insertion angle (for oscillation only) Degrees
FZ Feedrate FZ (for Center only) mm/min
EP Insertion pitch (for Helical only) mm/rev
ER Insertion radius (for Helical only) mm
Select lift-off If the machining operation requires several points of insertion, the retraction height
mode, must be programmed:
• To return plane mm
• Z0 + safety clearance (SC) mm

On making the transition to the next insertion point, the tool returns to this height.
If the pocket area does not contain any elements larger than Z0, then
Z0 + safety clearance (SC) can be programmed as the lift-off mode.

When input manually, the starting point can also be located outside
the pocket. This can be useful, for example, when machining a pocket
which is open on one side. The machining operation then begins
without insertion with a linear movement into the open side of the
pocket.

3.5.8 Remove residual material

Function

Residual material can be removed from a partially machined pocket


with islands. This function is optional.

Notes
It is normally assumed that "solid machining" has taken place before
residual material is removed. The residual material is calculated by
comparing the cutter used for solid machining and the current cutting
tool.
You can program any other tool as the reference tool for the
All
param. calculation under softkey "All param.".
Example: If the same pocket needs to be milled in several different
places, it is best to machine all pockets first and then remove all
residual material to minimize the number of tool changes required.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-127
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.5 Contour milling 3
Select with softkeys Contour Residual
milling material >

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for residual material

Parameters Description Unit

T, F, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".


Machining type Roughing
TR Reference tool for residual material
Z0 Workpiece height (abs.) mm
Z1 Depth in relation to Z0 (abs. or incr.) mm
DXY Max. infeed, plane mm
Alternatively, you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as a ratio --> plane infeed %
(mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm).
DZ Max. infeed, depth mm
UXY Finishing allowance, plane mm
UZ Finishing allowance, depth mm
Select lift-off If the machining operation requires several points of insertion, the retraction height
mode, can be programmed:
• To return plane mm
• Z0 + safety clearance (SC) mm
On making the transition to the next insertion point, the tool returns to this height.
If the pocket area does not contain any elements larger than Z0, then
Z0 + safety clearance (SC) can be programmed as the lift-off mode.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-128 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.5 Contour milling 3
3.5.9 Finish pocket with islands

Function

After solid machining and removal of residual material (if necessary),


you can finish cut the pocket and islands.
In this case, the base can be finished in the depth or the edge in the
plane in one machining operation.

Select with softkeys Contour Remove


milling >

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for "Finish pocket with islands"

Parameters Description of finish cut along base: Unit

T, F, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".


Machining type Finishing on base
Z0 Workpiece height (abs.) mm
Z1 Depth in relation to Z0 (abs. or incr.) mm
DXY Max. infeed, plane mm
Alternatively, you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as a ratio --> plane infeed %
(mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm).
UXY Finishing allowance, plane mm
UZ Finishing allowance, depth mm
Starting point The start point can be determined automatically or entered manually.
When entered manually, the start point can be positioned outside the pocket. In this
case, the tool first machines along a straight line into the pocket, e.g. for a pocket
open on the side without insertion.
X Coordinate of start point (abs.), manual input only mm
Y Coordinate of start point (abs.), manual input only mm
Insertion Pe = oscillating: The tool is inserted at the programmed angle (EW).
He = Helical: The tool is inserted along a helical path with the
programmed radius (ER) and programmed pitch (EP).
Mi = Center: This insertion strategy requires a cutter which cuts across
center. It is inserted at the programmed feedrate (FZ).
EW Insertion angle (for oscillation only) Degrees
EP Insertion pitch (for Helical only) mm/rev
ER Insertion radius (for Helical only) mm

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-129
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.5 Contour milling 3
FZ Feedrate FZ (for Center only) mm/min
Select lift-off If the machining operation requires several points of insertion, the retraction height
mode, can be programmed:
• To return plane mm
• Z0 + safety clearance (SC) mm
On making the transition to the next insertion point, the tool returns to this height.
If the pocket area does not contain any elements larger than Z0, then
Z0 + safety clearance (SC) can be programmed as the lift-off mode.

Parameters Description of finish cut along edge: Unit

T, F, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".


Machining type Finishing on edge
Z0 Workpiece height (abs.) mm
Z1 Depth in relation to Z0 (abs. or incr.) mm
DZ Max. infeed, depth mm
UXY Finishing allowance, plane mm
Select lift-off If the machining operation requires several points of insertion, the retraction height
mode, can be programmed:
• To return plane mm
• Z0 + safety clearance (SC) mm

On making the transition to the next insertion point, the tool returns to this height.
If the pocket area does not contain any elements larger than Z0, then
Z0 + safety clearance (SC) can be programmed as the lift-off mode.
Note: An alternative to the "Edge finish cut" option is the "Path milling" function
which offers greater optimization potential (approach and retract strategies and
modes).

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-130 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.6 Programing simple path motions 3

3.6 Programing simple path motions


This function is intended for the implementation of very simple
machining operations as path movements.
More complex operations such as contours with chamfers, radii,
approach strategies, tangential transitions, etc. should be
implemented using the "Mill contour" and "Path milling" functions.

You must program a tool before you program simple lines or circles. A
tool with spindle speed is selected by means of softkeys "Straight
circle" and "Tool".
You can only program rapid traverse for linear travel motions.

3.6.1 Line

Function

The tool moves at the programmed feedrate or in rapid traverse from


its current position to the programmed end position.

Radius compensation You can machine with radius compensation if you wish. The radius
compensation has a modal action.

When executing the first path motion with radius compensation, the
tool traverses without compensation at the starting point and with
compensation at the end point, i.e. when a vertical path is
programmed, the tool traverses and oblique path. The compensation
is not applied over the entire traversing path until the second
programmed path motion with radius compensation is executed. The
effect is reversed when you deselect radius compensation.

programmed
programmed path
path

travel path travel path

First path motion with First path motion with deselected radius
radius compensation compensation

To avoid deviation between the programmed and actually traversed


path, you can program the first path motion with radius compensation
or deselected radius compensation outside the workpiece. You cannot
program a motion without specifying coordinates.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-131
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.6 Programing simple path motions 3

Select with softkeys Straight Straight


Circle

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for a line

Parameters Description Unit

X Coordinate of end point in X direction (abs. or incr.) mm


Y Coordinate of end point in Y direction (abs. or incr.) mm
Z Coordinate of end point in Z direction (abs. or incr.) mm
Radius Input defining which side of the contour the cutter travels in the programmed
compensation direction:
Radius compensation, left Radius compensation off
of contour
Radius compensation, right Radius compensation is retained
of contour as set

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-132 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.6 Programing simple path motions 3
3.6.2 Circle with known center point

Function

The tool travels along a circular path from its current position to the
programmed circle end point. You must know the position of the circle
center point. The control calculates the radius of the circle/arc on the
basis of your interpolation parameter settings.
The circle can only be traversed at machining feedrate. You must
program a tool before the circle can be traversed.

Select with softkeys Straight Circle


Circle Center point

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for circle with known center point

Parameters Description Unit

Direction of The tool travels in the programmed direction from the circle start point to its end
rotation point. You can program this direction as clockwise or counter-clockwise.
X X position circle end point (abs. or incr.) mm
Y Y position circle end point (abs. or incr.) mm
I Distance between circle start and center point in X direction (incr.) mm
J Distance between circle start and center point in Y direction (incr.) mm
Plane The circle is traversed in the set plane with the relevant interpolation parameters:
XYIJ: XY plane with interpolation parameters I and J mm
XZIK: XZ plane with interpolation parameters I and K mm
YZJK: YZ plane with interpolation parameters J and K mm

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-133
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.6 Programing simple path motions 3
3.6.3 Circle with known radius

Function

The tool traverses a circular path with the programmed radius from its
current position to the programmed circle end point. The control
system works out the circle center point. You do not need to program
interpolation parameters.
The circle can only be traversed at machining feedrate.

Select with softkeys Straight Circle


Circle Radius

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for circle with known radius

Parameters Description Unit

Direction of The tool travels in the programmed direction from the circle start point to its end
rotation point. You can program this direction as clockwise or counter-clockwise.
X X position circle end point (abs. or incr.) mm
Y Y position circle end point (abs. or incr.) mm
R Radius of arc; mm
You can select the arc of your choice by entering a positive or a negative sign.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-134 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.6 Programing simple path motions 3

3.6.4 Helix

Function

Helical interpolation is implemented by superimposing a linear motion


in the tool axis on a circular motion in the plane.

Select with softkeys Straight


Helix
Circle

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for a helix

Parameters Description Unit

Direction of The tool travels in the programmed direction from the circle start point to its end
rotation point. You can program this direction as clockwise or counter-clockwise.
I, J Incremental: Distance between helix start and center point mm
in X and Y directions
Absolute: Center point of helix in X and Y directions
P Pitch of helix; The pitch is programmed in mm per revolution. mm/360 °
Z Z position of helix end point (abs. or incr.) mm

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-135
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.6 Programing simple path motions 3
3.6.5 Polar coordinates

Function

If a workpiece has been dimensioned from a central point (pole) with


radius and angles, you will find it helpful to program these as polar
coordinates.
You can program straight lines and circles as polar coordinates.

Define a pole You must define the pole before you can program a line or circle in
polar coordinates. This pole acts as the reference point of the polar
coordinate system.
The angle for the first line or circle then needs to be programmed in
absolute coordinates. You can program the angles for any further lines
and circles as either absolute or incremental coordinates.

Select with softkeys Straight


Polar Pole
Circle

Parameters Description Unit

X X position of pole (abs. or incr.) mm


Y Y position of pole (abs. or incr.) mm

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-136 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.6 Programing simple path motions 3
3.6.6 Polar line

Function

A straight line in the polar coordinate system is defined by a radius (L)


and an angle (α). The angle refers to the X axis.
The tool moves from its current position on a straight line to the
programmed end point at the machining feedrate or in rapid traverse.

The 1st line in polar coordinates entered after the pole must be
programmed with an absolute angle. You can program any further
lines or circles with incremental coordinates.

Select with softkeys Straight


Polar
Straight
Circle Polar

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for polar line with absolute and incremental angle

Parameters Description Unit

L Radius from pole to end point of line mm


α Polar angle (abs. or incr., positive or negative) Degrees
Radius Input defining which side of the contour the cutter travels in the programmed
compensation direction:
Radius compensation, left Radius compensation off
of contour
Radius compensation, right Radius compensation is retained
of contour as set

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-137
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.6 Programing simple path motions 3
3.6.7 Polar circle

Function

A circle in the polar coordinate system is defined by an angle (α). The


angle refers to the X axis.
The tool moves from its current position on a circular path to the
programmed end point (angle) at the machining feedrate.
The radius corresponds to the distance from the current tool position
to the defined pole, i.e. the circle start and end point positions are at
the same distance from the defined pole.

The 1st circle in polar coordinates entered after the pole must be
programmed with an absolute angle. You can program any further
lines or circles with incremental coordinates.

Select with softkeys Straight


Polar
Circle
Circle Polar

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for polar circle with absolute and incremental angle

Parameters Description Unit

Direction of The tool travels in the programmed direction from the circle start point to its end
rotation point. You can program this direction as clockwise (right) or counter-clockwise (left).
α Polar angle (abs. or incr., positive or negative) Degrees

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-138 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.6 Programing simple path motions 3
3.6.8 Programming examples for polar coordinates

Program a pentagon You want to machine the outside contour of a pentagon.


Make sure that you enter the correct workpiece dimensions!
Approach start point in rapid traverse: X70, Y50, radius compensation off.
Pole: X=50, Y=50
1. 1st polar line: L=20, α= −72 absolute, radius compensation right
2. 2nd to 5th polar line: L=20, α= −72 degrees incremental,
Radius compensation right

Programming graphic and extract from machining plan

Program an arc of You want to machine the outside contour of an arc.


225 degrees Make sure that you enter the correct workpiece dimensions!
Approach start point in rapid traverse: X=80, Y=50, radius compensation right
Pole: X=60, Y=50
CW rotation, α= 135 degrees absolute

Programming graphic and extract from machining plan

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-139
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.7 Drilling 3

3.7 Drilling

Program holes and threads In ShopMill you first need to program the machining operations in the
exact order in which they need to be performed, e.g.
1. Centering, with tool and input of spindle speed and machining
feedrate
2. Deep-hole drilling, with tool and input of spindle speed and
machining feedrate
3. Tapping with tool and input of spindle speed and machining
feedrate

Once you have programmed the technologies, you need to enter the
position data. ShopMill provides various positioning patterns (see
Section "Positions").

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-140 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.7 Drilling 3

3.7.1 Centering

Function

The tool is moved in rapid traverse to the position to be centered,


allowing for the return plane and safety clearance. The tool is inserted
into the workpiece at programmed feedrate (F) until it reaches Z1 or
until the surface diameter is the correct size. When the dwell time
expires, the tool is retracted in rapid traverse to either the return plane
or the safety clearance depending on the setting in parameter
"Retraction position pattern". You will find parameter "Retraction
position pattern" in the program header or under "Settings" in the
"Miscellaneous" menu.

Select with softkeys Drilling Centering

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for centering at depth Help display for centering on diameter

Parameters Description Unit

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".


Diameter The tool is inserted into the workpiece until the diameter on the surface is the correct
size. The angle for the center drill entered in the tool list is applied in this case.
Tip The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the programmed insertion depth is
reached.
∅ It is inserted into the workpiece until the diameter is correct. mm
Z1 It is inserted into the workpiece until it reaches Z1. mm
Z0 Height of workpiece; Z0 is specified in the position pattern ("Positioning" softkey). mm
DT Dwell time for relief cut s

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-141
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.7 Drilling 3

3.7.2 Drilling and reaming

Function

The tool is moved in rapid traverse to the programmed position,


allowing for the return plane and safety clearance. It is then inserted
into the workpiece at the feedrate programmed under F until it reaches
depth Z1.

Drilling: If Z1 has been reached and the dwell time expired, the drill is
retracted at rapid traverse either to the return plane or the safety
clearance depending on the setting in parameter "Retraction position
pattern". You will find parameter "Retraction position pattern" in the
program header or under "Settings" in the "Miscellaneous" menu.

Reaming: If Z1 has been reached and the dwell time expired, the
reamer is retracted at the programmed retraction feedrate to the
safety clearance.

Select with softkeys Drilling Drilling


Reaming

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for drilling Help display for reaming

Parameters Description Unit

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".


Shank The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the value
programmed for Z1. The insertion angle entered in the tool list is applied.
Tip The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches the value
programmed for Z1 (does not apply in reaming).
Z1 Insertion depth for drill tip or drill shank. mm
Z0 Height of workpiece; Z0 is specified in the position pattern ("Positioning" softkey). mm
DT Dwell time for relief cut s
FB Retraction feedrate (for reaming only)

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-142 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.7 Drilling 3

3.7.3 Deep-hole drilling

Function

The tool is moved in rapid traverse to the programmed position,


allowing for the return plane and safety clearance. It is then inserted
into the workpiece at the programmed feedrate.

Select with softkeys Drilling Deep hole


drilling

Stock The tool drills at the programmed feedrate (F) until the 1st infeed
removal
depth is reached. On reaching the 1st depth, the tool is retracted from
the workpiece at rapid traverse for stock removal and is then re-
inserted at the 1st infeed depth reduced by a clearance distance
calculated by the control system. The tool then drills to the next infeed
depth and is then retracted again, repeating this process until the final
drill depth (Z1) is reached. On expiry of the dwell time, the tool is
retracted at rapid traverse to the safety clearance.

Chip- The tool drills at the programmed feedrate (F) until the 1st infeed
breaking
depth is reached. Once this depth is reached, the tool is retracted by a
specific amount for chipbreaking and is then inserted again down to
the next drilling depth. It repeats this process until the final drilling
depth (Z1) is reached.

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for deep hole drilling with Help display for deep hole drilling with
chipbreaking stock removal

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-143
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.7 Drilling 3
Parameters Description Unit

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".


Tip The final drilling depth (Z1) refers to the drill tip
Shank The final drilling depth (Z1) refers to the drill shank
Z1 Final drilling depth (incr.) mm
Z0 Height of workpiece; Z0 is specified in the position pattern ("Positioning" softkey). mm
D Max. infeed mm
DF Reduction factor for infeed. The new infeed is obtained by multiplying the previous
infeed by DF.
DF=1: Infeed increment remains unchanged
DF<1: Infeed increment is reduced in direction of final drilling depth
Example application: Last infeed was 4 mm; DF is 0.8
Next infeed = 4 x 0.8 = 3.2 mm
Next infeed = 3.2 x 0.8 = 2.56 mm etc.
V1 Minimum infeed mm
Parameter V1 is provided only if DF< 1 has been programmed.
If the infeed increment becomes minimal, a minimum infeed can be programmed in
parameter "V1".
V1 < infeed increment: The tool is inserted by the infeed increment.
V1 > infeed increment: The tool is inserted by the infeed value programmed under V1.
DT Dwell time for relief cut s

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-144 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.7 Drilling 3

3.7.4 Boring

Function

The tool is moved in rapid traverse to the programmed position,


allowing for the return plane and safety clearance. It is then inserted
into the workpiece at the feedrate programmed under F until it reaches
the programmed depth (Z1). "Lift off contour" or "Do not lift off
contour" can be programmed on expiry of the dwell time.

Select with softkeys Drilling Boring

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for boring

Parameters Description Unit

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".


Lift off contour The cutting edge is retracted from the bore edge and then moved back to the return
plane. The parameters for lift-off distance and tool orientation angle can be set via a
machine data.
Do not lift off The cutting edge is not retracted, but traverses back to the safety clearance in rapid
contour traverse.
Z1 Depth in relation to Z0 (abs. or incr.) mm
Z0 Height of workpiece; Z0 is specified in the position pattern ("Positioning" softkey). mm
DT Dwell time for relief cut s
D Lift-off distance (can be set in a machine data) *) mm
α Tool orientation angle (can be set in a machine data) *) Degrees
*) applies only when tool is lifted off

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-145
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.7 Drilling 3
3.7.5 Tapping

Function

The tool is moved in rapid traverse to the programmed position,


allowing for the return plane and safety clearance. It is then inserted
down to the programmed depth (Z1) in the workpiece.

A compensating chuck is not required.

The spindle speed can be controlled by the spindle override during


tapping. The feed override is inoperative during this process.

Select with softkeys Drilling Spindle Tapping

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for tapping

Parameters Description Unit

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".


P Pitch mm/rev
The pitch is determined by the tool used. inch/rev
When you enter the thread pitch in turns/’’, enter the whole number before the MODULE
decimal point in the first parameter field and the number after the decimal point as a Turns/"
fraction in the second and third fields.
For example, enter 13.5 turns/’’ in the following way:
Z1 Tapping depth (abs. or incr.) mm
Z0 Height of workpiece; Z0 is specified in the position pattern ("Positioning" softkey). mm

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-146 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.7 Drilling 3

3.7.6 Thread cutting

Function

You can use a form cutter to machine any type of right-hand or left-
hand thread.
Threads can be machined as right-hand or left-hand threads and from
top to bottom or vice versa.

Select with softkeys Drilling Spindle Cut


thread

Inside thread Sequence of operations:


• Position on thread center point on return plane in rapid traverse
• Infeed at rapid traverse to reference plane shifted forward by
amount corresponding to safety clearance
• Approach along an approach circle calculated in the control at
programmed feedrate
• Approach motion to thread diameter on circular path
• Cut thread along a helical path in clockwise or counter-clockwise
direction (depending on whether it is left-hand or right-hand thread)
• Exit motion along a circular path in the same rotational direction at
programmed feedrate
• Retract to thread center point and then to return plane in rapid
traverse

Outside thread Sequence of operations:


• Position on starting point in return plane at rapid traverse
• Infeed at rapid traverse to reference plane shifted forward by
amount corresponding to safety clearance
• Approach along an approach circle calculated in the control at
programmed feedrate
• Approach motion to thread diameter on circular path
• Cut thread along a helical path in clockwise or counter-clockwise
direction (depending on whether it is left-hand or right-hand thread)
• Exit motion along a circular path in opposite rotational direction at
programmed feedrate
• Retract to return plane in rapid traverse

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-147
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.7 Drilling 3

Select key
to call Help display

Help displays for thread cutting

Parameters Description Unit

Machining type Roughing


Thread cutting up to programmed finishing allowance (U)
Finishing
Direction Depending on the rotational direction of the spindle, a change in direction also
changes the machining direction (climb/conventional).
Z0 to Z1: Machining begins on workpiece surface Z0.
Z1 to Z0: The machining starts at thread depth, e.g. for blind hole tapping
Inside thr. An inside thread is cut.
Outside thr. An outside thread is cut.
Left thr. A left-hand thread is cut.
Right thr. A right-hand thread is cut.
NT Number of teeth in a milling insert.
Single or multiple toothed milling inserts can be used. The cutting teeth are entered
in parameter NT. The necessary motions are executed internally by the cycle in such
a manner that the tip of the bottom tooth on the milling insert corresponds to the
programmed end position when the thread end position is reached. Depending on
the cutting edge geometry of the milling insert, the retraction path must be taken into
account at the base of the workpiece.
Z1 Thread length mm
Z0 Height of workpiece; Z0 is specified in the position pattern ("Positioning" softkey). mm
∅ Nominal thread diameter, example: Nominal diameter of M12 = 12 mm mm

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-148 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.7 Drilling 3
P Pitch mm/rev
If the milling insert has several teeth, the pitch will be dependent on the tool used. inch/rev
When you enter the thread pitch in turns/’’, enter the whole number before the MODULE
decimal point in the first parameter field and the number after the decimal point as a Turns/"
fraction in the second and third fields.
For example, enter 13.5 turns/’’ in the following way:
K Thread depth mm
DXY Infeed per cut mm
Alternatively, you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as a ratio --> plane infeed %
(mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm).
U Finishing allowance mm
α0 Start angle Degrees

Programming example for Cut circular pocket in a solid blank and cut a thread.
thread cutting The milling tool cannot cut across center. The circular pocket will
therefore have to be predrilled with a Ø22 mm drill. The milling tool
can then be inserted centrally.

Using position patterns, the positions of the above-mentioned cycles


can be programmed (see Section "Using position patterns in milling").

Y Y
A A-B
56
50

B
60 X 40 Z

Workshop drawing of circular pocket with thread

Extract from machining plan; cut a circular pocket with thread

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-149
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.7 Drilling 3

3.7.7 Position on freely programmable positions and position patterns

Function

After you have programmed the machining technologies, you must


program the positions. ShopMill offers a variety of positioning patterns,
i.e.
• Freely programmable positions
• Position on a line or matrix
• Position on a full or pitch circle

You can program any number of these position patterns one after the
other. They are traversed in the order in which you program them.

The programmed technologies and subsequently programmed


positions are automatically chained by the control.

Machining sequence and The first tool in the program traverses all programmed positions, e.g.
tool travel path center all positions. The second tool in the program then machines all
programmed positions, etc. This process is repeated until every
programmed drilling operation has been performed at every
programmed position.

Inside a position pattern or on the approach from one position pattern


to the next, the tool is retracted to safety clearance in the case of
optimized retraction, or otherwise to the return plane (see also Section
"Create new program; define a blank"). The new position is then
approached in rapid traverse.

If the position pattern consists of only one position, the tool is retracted
to the return plane after machining.

Select with softkeys Drilling Positions

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-150 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.7 Drilling 3

3.7.8 Freely programmable positions

Function

This pattern allows you to program positions freely, i.e. rectangular or


polar, in the X/Y plane. Individual positions are approached in the
order in which you program them. Press softkey "Delete all" to delete
all positions programmed in X/Y.

Select with softkeys Drilling Positions

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for "Freely programmable Help display for "Freely programmable
positions, rectangular" positions, polar"

Parameters Description Unit

Rectangular/ Programming with rectangular or polar dimensions.


polar
Z0 Height of workpiece (abs. or incr.) mm
X0 1st Position of the hole in X (abs. or incr.) mm
Y0 1st Position of the hole in Y (abs. or incr.) mm
Rectangular:
X1 ... X8 Other positions in the X axis (abs. or incr.) mm
Y1 ... Y8 Other positions in the Y axis (abs. or incr.) mm

If you want to program further positions, store the ones you have already
programmed and then open the parameter input form again by pressing softkey
"Any positions".
Polar:
L1 ... L7 Position distance (abs.) mm
α1 ... α7 Angle of rotation of line in relation to the X axis. Degrees
Positive angle: Line is rotated in CCW direction.
Negative angle: Line is rotated in CW direction.

If you want to program further positions, store the ones you have already
programmed and then open the parameter input form again by pressing softkey
"Any positions".

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-151
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.7 Drilling 3

3.7.9 Line position pattern

Function

You can use this function to program any number of positions spaced
at the same distance along a line.

Select with softkeys Drilling Positions

Position the cursor in the "Line/matrix" field. You can toggle between
Matrix and Line by means of softkey "Alternat.".

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for "Line"

Parameters Description Unit

Z0 Height of workpiece (abs. or incr.) mm


This position must be programmed absolutely in the first call.
X0 Reference point (first position) mm
This position must be programmed absolutely in the first call.
Y0 Reference point (first position) mm
This position must be programmed absolutely in the first call.
α0 Angle of rotation of line in relation to the X axis. Degrees
Positive angle: Line is rotated in CCW direction.
Negative angle: Line is rotated in CW direction.
L Position spacing. mm
N Number of positions.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-152 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.7 Drilling 3

3.7.10 Matrix position pattern

Function

You can use this function to program any number of positions spaced
at an equal distance along one or several parallel lines.

Select with softkeys Drilling Positions

Position the cursor in the "Line/matrix" field. You can toggle between
Matrix and Line by means of softkey "Alternat.".

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for "Matrix"

Parameters Description Unit

Z0 Height of workpiece (abs. or incr.) mm


This position must be programmed absolutely in the first call.
X0 Reference point (first position) mm
This position must be programmed absolutely in the first call.
Y0 Reference point (first position) mm
This position must be programmed absolutely in the first call.
α0 Angle of rotation of matrix in relation to X axis. Degrees
Positive angle: Matrix is rotated in CCW direction.
Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction.
L1 Position spacing in X direction in relation to an angle of 0 degrees. mm
L2 Position spacing in Y direction in relation to an angle of 0 degrees.
N1 Number of positions in X direction in relation to an angle of 0 degrees.
N2 Number of positions in Y direction in relation to an angle of 0 degrees.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-153
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.7 Drilling 3
3.7.11 Full circle position pattern

Function

This function can be used to program drill holes on a circle with a


defined radius. The basic angle of rotation (α0) for the 1st position
refers to the X axis. The control calculates the angle of the next hole
position as a function of the total number of holes. The angle it
calculates is identical for all positions.

The tool can approach the next position along a linear or circular path.

The tool approaches the positions on a The tool approaches the positions
linear path. The result may be a contour on the programmed circular path.
violation in a circumferential groove. No contour violation results in a
circumferential groove.

Approach positions on a linear or circular path

Select with softkeys Drilling Positions

If you position the cursor on the "Full/pitch circle" field, you can toggle
between the two options using softkey "Alternat.".

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for "Full circle of holes"

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-154 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.7 Drilling 3
Parameters Description Unit

Z0 Height of workpiece (abs. or incr.) mm


X0 X position of full circle center point (abs. or incr.) mm
Y0 Y position of full circle center point (abs. or incr.) mm
α0 Basic angle of rotation; angle of 1st hole in relation to X axis. Degrees
Positive angle: Full circle is rotated in CCW direction.
Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in CW direction.
R Radius of full circle mm
N Number of positions on full circle
FP Feed for positioning on a circular path. mm/min
Positioning Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse.
Circular: Next position is approached at the programmed feedrate
(FP) along a circular path.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-155
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.7 Drilling 3

3.7.12 Pitch circle position pattern

Function

This function can be used to program holes on a pitch circle with a


defined radius.
The tool can approach the next position along a linear or circular path.
(please see "Full circle" for detailed description).

Select with softkeys Drilling Positions

If you position the cursor on the "Full/pitch circle" field, you can toggle
between the two options using softkey "Alternat.".

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for "Pitch circle"

Parameters Description Unit

Z0 Height of workpiece (abs. or incr.) mm


X0 X position of pitch circle center point (abs. or incr.) mm
Y0 Y position of pitch circle center point (abs. or incr.) mm
α0 Basic angle of rotation; angle of 1st position in relation to X axis. Degrees
Positive angle: Pitch circle is rotated in CCW direction.
Negative angle: Pitch circle is rotated in CW direction.
α1 Advance angle; after the first hole has been drilled, all further positions are Degrees
approached at this angle.
Positive angle: Further positions are rotated in a CCW direction.
Negative angle: Further positions are rotated in a CW direction.
R Radius of pitch circle mm
N Number of positions (holes) on the pitch circle
FP Feed for positioning on a circular path. mm/min
Positioning Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse.
Circular: Next position is approached at the programmed feedrate (FP)
along a circular path.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-156 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.7 Drilling 3

3.7.13 Obstacle

Function

If there is an obstacle between 2 position patterns, it can be crossed.


The height of the obstacle can be programmed absolutely or
incrementally.

If all positions in the 1st pattern have been machined, the tool axis
travels in rapid traverse to a height corresponding to the obstacle
height + safety clearance. The new position is approached in rapid
traverse at this height. The tool axis then approaches a position
corresponding to Z0 of the position pattern + safety clearance.

Select with softkeys Drilling Positions Obstacle

Note Obstacles are registered only if they lie between 2 position patterns.
If the tool change point and the programmed return plane are
positioned below the obstacle, the tool travels to the return plane
height and on to the new position without taking the obstacle into
account. The obstacle must not be higher than the return plane.

Programming example Drilling 4 positions with an obstacle in-between.


The holes are first centered and then drilled. When you have programmed
the first two positions at X=15, you need to program the obstacle. The
remaining positions are then programmed at X=100.

Safety clearance (SC)


Z Z=20

Z=0

Z=-20
X
30

46

15
100

Workshop drawing

Extract from machining plan for "Obstacle" programming example

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-157
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.7 Drilling 3

3.7.14 Repeat positions

Function

If you want the tool to re-approach positions that you have already
programmed, the "Repeat positions" function is a quick and easy
solution.

You must specify the number of the position pattern. This is a number
assigned automatically by ShopMill. You will find it inserted after the
block number in the machining plan.

Extract from machining plan, position pattern number=001

Select with softkeys Drilling Repeat


positions

After you have entered the position pattern number, e.g. 1, press
softkey "Accept". The position pattern you have selected is then
approached again.

Extract from machining plan; repeat positions in block no. 60

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-158 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.7 Drilling 3

3.7.15 Programming examples for drilling

Drilling at different heights Machining task: You have already cut a recess in a workpiece. You now
want to machine blind and through holes of Ø 12 mm on this workpiece with
different machining planes.
Programming:
Center the 4 holes
Deep drill the blind holes with stock removal
Deep drill the through holes with chipbreaking

Tool

Return plane

Safety
Z clearance
Z0
for Z=0
Z-14
Safety
clearance
for Z= -36 Z-36

Z-50
X

Y 4 holes
Diameter 12 mm
30
12

25
60 Rapid traverse
X Machining feedrate

Workshop drawing

Extract from machining plan

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-159
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.7 Drilling 3
Drilling with a counterbore You want to machine through holes with screw head recesses around a pitch
circle on a workpiece.
When you program the counterbore, you must select offset value D2
(see Section "Create tool offset block for tool edge 1/2").

Z 15 Cut A-B
9

8.5
30
X

80 45

60
Y
40

A
50
100

Workshop drawing

Extract from machining plan

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-160 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.8 Milling 3

3.8 Milling

3.8.1 Face milling

Function

You can use this cycle to face mill any workpiece. Two types of cut
can be programmed in the cycle:
Roughing:
• Several material removal operations on surface
• Tool turns above the workpiece edge

Finishing:
• First material removal operation on surface
• Tool turns at safety clearance height
• Retraction of mill

Depth infeed always takes place outside the workpiece.

A percentage cutting width for the milling tool can be stored in a


machine data for face milling operations. This value determines how
far the tool overshoots the workpiece during face milling operations.
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!

Select with softkeys Milling Face


milling

Then select the machining strategy using the vertical softkeys.

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for face milling, alternate Help display for face milling, alternate
machining directions in parallel to X axis machining directions in parallel to Y axis

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-161
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.8 Milling 3

Help display for face milling, one milling Help display for face milling, one
direction in parallel to X axis machining direction in parallel to Y axis

Parameters Description Unit

Machining type Roughing:


Face milling up to programmed finishing allowance (UZ).
Finishing:
The surface is milled once in the plane. The tool is retracted after every cut.
X0, Y0 Corner point 1 of surface in X or Y direction (abs. or incr.) mm
Z0 Height of blank (abs. or incr.)
X1 Corner point 2 of surface in X direction (abs. or incr.) mm
Y1 Corner point 2 of surface in Y direction (abs. or incr.)
Z1 Height of finished part (abs. or incr.)
DXY Max. infeed in the XY plane (dependent on mill diameter) mm
Alternatively, you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as a ratio Å plane infeed %
(mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm).
DZ Max. infeed in Z direction mm
UZ Finishing allowance mm

• Define corner point 1 of the surface where machining is to begin.


• The same finishing allowance must be entered for both roughing
and finishing. The finishing allowance is used to position the tool for
retraction.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-162 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.8 Milling 3
Programming example You want to cut to a depth of 10 mm on a workpiece surface. 8 mm must be
Face milling removed in a rough cut and 2 mm in a finish cut. The cutter diameter is
40 mm.
Blank dimensions: X0=0, Y0=0, Z0=10, X1=100 abs., Y1=50 abs., Z1=0 abs

Roughing
Finishing
ZO=10

UZ=2
Z1=0

Z
Z=-40
100

Face milling: Roughing and finishing

Face milling, roughing Face milling, finishing

Extract from machining plan; Roughing and finishing in face milling

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-163
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.8 Milling 3

3.8.2 Mill a rectangular pocket

Function

You can mill a rectangular pocket of any type with this cycle.
Approach: The tool axis first approaches the pocket centre point in
the return plane (RP) in rapid traverse. It then feeds in to the safety
clearance (SC) in rapid traverse. The pocket is then machined
according the selected insertion strategy allowing for the unfinished
part dimensions.
Finishing: The pocket edge is always finished first, followed by the
pocket base. The tool traverses the pocket only once when finishing
the edge. The pocket edge is approached on the quadrant which joins
the corner radius. If the tool executes a depth infeed when finishing
the pocket edge, it approaches the pocket centre in the plane,
executes the new depth infeed in rapid traverse and approaches the
start point of the quadrant in rapid traverse.
When finishing the pocket base, the tool rapidly approaches a position
corresponding to pocket depth + finishing allowance + safety
clearance over the pocket centre point. It is then inserted vertically to
pocket depth at the programmed depth infeed rate. The pocket base is
machined in a single operation.

Select with softkeys Milling Pocket Rectangular


pocket

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for milling a rectangular pocket

Parameters Description Unit

T, F, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".


Position of 5 different positions for the reference point can be selected:
reference point • Pocket centre
• Lower left-hand corner
• Lower right-hand corner
• Upper left-hand corner
• Upper right-hand corner
The reference point (highlighted in yellow) is displayed in the Help screen.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-164 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.8 Milling 3
Machining type Roughing
Finishing
Finishing on edge
Single pos. A rectangular pocket is machined at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0).
Pos. pattern Several rectangular pockets are machined in a position pattern (e.g. full circle,
pitch circle, matrix, etc.).
The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 Position in X direction (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
Y0 Position in Y direction (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
Z0 Workpiece height (abs.) or incr. mm
W Pocket width mm
L Pocket length mm
R Radius at pocket corners mm
α0 Angle of rotation of pocket in relation to X axis. Degrees
Z1 Depth of pocket in relation to Z0 (abs. or incr.) mm
DXY Max. infeed in plane (XY direction) mm
Alternatively, you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as a ratio Å plane infeed %
(mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm).
DZ Max. depth infeed (Z direction) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in plane (pocket edge) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) mm
Insertion You can select several insertion strategies:
Helical: Insertion along helical path
The cutter centre point traverses along the helical path determined by the radius and
depth per revolution. If the depth for one infeed has been reached, a full circle
motion is executed to eliminate the inclined insertion path.
Oscillation: Insertion with oscillation along centre axis of pocket
The cutter center point oscillates along a linear path until it reaches the depth infeed.
Once it has reached the required depth, it traverses the path again without depth
infeed in order to eliminate the inclined insertion path.
Center: Insert vertically in centre of pocket
The tool executes the calculated depth infeed vertically in the centre of the pocket.
Note: This setting can be used only if the cutter can cut across centre or if the
pocket has been predrilled.
EP Max. insertion pitch (for helical insertion only) mm/rev
ER Insertion radius (for helical insertion only) mm
EW Insertion angle (for insertion with oscillation only) Degrees
FZ Depth infeed rate (for insertion in centre only) mm/min
mm/tooth
Solid Complete machining:
machining The pocket must be milled from a solid workpiece (e.g. casting).
Remachining:
A small pocket or hole has already been machined in the workpiece. This needs to
be enlarged in one or several axes. You must program parameters AZ, W1 and L1
for this purpose.
AZ Depth of premachined pocket (for remachining only) mm
W1 Width of premachined pocket (for remachining only) mm
L1 Length of premachined pocket (for remachining only) mm

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-165
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.8 Milling 3

Programming example You wish to cut a rectangular pocket, starting with a rough cut operation and
followed by a finish cut. Since the cutting tool you are using cannot cut across
centre, the workpiece needs to be predrilled first with a drill of Ø 20 mm.

120
80 Predrilled
Diameter 20 mm

90
50
Y
Finishing allowance 1 mm

Reference point of rectangular pocket

Workpiece drawing of the rectangular pocket

Rough cut a rectangular pocket Finish cut a rectangular pocket

Extract from machining plan; predrilling and milling a rectangular pocket

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-166 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.8 Milling 3
3.8.3 Mill a circular pocket

Function

You can mill a circular pocket with this cycle.


You can cut the circular pocket
• from a solid workpiece or
• predrill the centre of the pocket, for example, where you are using
a cutter that cannot cut across centre
(for programming example, see rectangular pocket).

Approach:The tool axis first approaches the pocket centre point in the
return plane (RP) in rapid traverse. The tool axis then moves to safety
clearance (SC) in rapid traverse. The pocket is then machined
according the selected insertion strategy allowing for the unfinished
part dimensions.
Finishing:The pocket edge is always finished first, followed by the
pocket base. The tool traverses the pocket only once when finishing
the edge. The pocket edge is approached on the quadrant which joins
the corner radius. If the tool executes a depth infeed when finishing
the pocket edge, it approaches the pocket centre in the plane,
executes the new depth infeed in rapid traverse and approaches the
start point of the quadrant in rapid traverse.
When finishing the pocket base, the tool rapidly approaches a position
corresponding to pocket depth + finishing allowance + safety
clearance over the pocket centre point. It is then inserted vertically to
pocket depth at the programmed depth infeed rate. The pocket base is
machined in a single operation.

Select with softkeys Milling Pocket Circular


pocket

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for milling a circular pocket

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-167
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.8 Milling 3

Parameters Description Unit

T, F, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".


Machining type Roughing
Finishing
Finishing on edge
Single pos. A circular pocket is machined at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0).
Pos. pattern Several circular pockets are machined in a position pattern (e.g. full circle, pitch
circle, matrix, etc.).
The positions refer to the centre point of the circular pocket:
X0 Position in X direction (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
Y0 Position in Y direction (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
Z0 Workpiece height (abs.) or incr. mm
∅ Diameter of pocket mm
Z1 Depth of pocket in relation to Z0 (abs. or incr.) mm
DXY Max. infeed in plane (XY direction) mm
Alternatively, you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as a ratio Å plane infeed %
(mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm).
DZ Max. depth infeed (Z direction) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in plane (pocket edge) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) mm
Insertion: You can select several insertion strategies:
Helical: Insertion along helical path
The cutter centre point traverses along the helical path determined by the radius and
depth per revolution. If the depth for one infeed has been reached, a full circle
motion is executed to eliminate the inclined insertion path.
Feedrate: Machining feedrate
Center: Insert vertically in centre of pocket
The tool executes the calculated depth infeed vertically in the centre of the pocket.
Feedrate: Infeed rate as programmed under FZ
Note: The vertical insertion into pocket centre method can be used only if the tool
can cut across centre or if the workpiece has been predrilled.
EP Max. insertion pitch (for helical insertion only) mm/rev
ER Insertion radius (for helical insertion only) mm
FZ Depth infeed rate (for insertion in centre only) mm/min
mm/tooth
Solid Complete machining:
machining The pocket must be milled from a solid workpiece (e.g. casting).
Remachining:
A small pocket or hole has already been machined in the workpiece. This needs to
be enlarged. Parameters AZ and ∅ must be programmed.
AZ Depth of premachined pocket or hole (for remachining only) mm
∅1 Diameter of premachined pocket or hole (for remachining only) mm

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-168 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.8 Milling 3
3.8.4 Mill rectangular spigots

Function

This cycle can be used to mill rectangular spigots of any type


with/without a corner radius on condition that a premachined, larger
rectangular spigot is available.

Shapes of a rectangular spigot

Select with softkeys Milling Spigot Rectangular


spigot

Contour The tool approaches the return plane (RP) in rapid traverse. It then
approach/retraction approaches the start point on return plane level (RP) that ShopMill has
calculated. The start point is located on the positive X axis rotated
through α0. It then approaches safety clearance (SC) at rapid
traverse.
The spigot contour is approached along a semi-circle at machining
feedrate. The tool first executes infeed at machining depth and then
moves in the plane. The spigot is machined as a function of the
programmed machining direction (climb/conventional) in a CW or
CCW direction. When the spigot has been circumnavigated once, the
tool retracts from the contour along a semi-circle in the plane and then
infeeds to the next machining depth. The contour is then approached
again in a semi-circle and the spigot traversed once. This process is
repeated until the programmed spigot depth is reached.
The tool finally approaches the return plane (RP) in rapid traverse.

Contour approach

Contour retraction

Contour approach/retraction along semi-circle with CW rotating spindle and


conventional milling operation

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-169
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.8 Milling 3

Select key
to call Help display

Help displays for milling rectangular spigots

Parameters Description Unit

T, F, S, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".


Reference You can select 5 different reference points:
point • Spigot center
• Bottom left
• Bottom right
• Top left
• Top right
Machining type Roughing
Finishing
Single pos. A rectangular spigot is machined at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0).
Pos. pattern Several rectangular spigots are machined in a position pattern (e.g. full circle,
pitch circle, matrix, etc.).
The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 Position in X direction (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
Y0 Position in Y direction (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
Z0 Workpiece height (abs.) or incr. mm
W Width of spigot after machining mm
L Length of spigot after machining mm
R Radius at edges of spigot (corner radius) mm
α0 Angle of rotation Degrees
Z1 Depth of spigot (abs. or incr.) mm
DZ Max. depth infeed (Z direction) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in the plane in relation to length (L) and width (W) of the spigot; mm
Smaller spigot dimensions are obtained by calling the cycle again and programming
it with a lower finishing allowance.
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (tool axis) mm
W1 Width of premachined spigot (important for determining approach position!) mm
L1 Length of premachined spigot (important for determining approach position!) mm

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-170 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.8 Milling 3
3.8.5 Mill circular spigots

Function

You can use this cycle to mill a circular spigot on condition that a
premachined, larger circular spigot is available.

Select with softkeys Milling Spigot Circular


spigot

Contour The tool approaches the return plane (RP) in rapid traverse. It then
approach/retraction approaches the start point on return plane level (RP) that ShopMill has
calculated. The start point is located on the positive X axis. It then
approaches safety clearance (SC) at rapid traverse.
The spigot contour is approached along a semi-circle at machining
feedrate. The tool first executes infeed at machining depth and then
moves in the plane. The spigot is machined as a function of the
programmed machining direction (climb/conventional) in a CW or
CCW direction. When the spigot has been circumnavigated once, the
tool retracts from the contour along a semi-circle in the plane and then
infeeds to the next machining depth. The contour is then approached
again in a semi-circle and the spigot traversed once. This process is
repeated until the programmed spigot depth is reached.
The tool finally approaches the return plane (RP) in rapid traverse.

Contour approach

Contour retraction

Contour approach/retraction along semi-circle with CW rotating spindle and


conventional milling operation

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-171
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.8 Milling 3

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for milling a circular spigot

Parameters Description Unit

T, F, S, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".


Machining type Roughing
Finishing
Single pos. A circular spigot is machined at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0).
Pos. pattern Several circular spigots are machined in a position pattern
(e.g. full circle, matrix, line).
The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 Position in X direction (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
Y0 Position in Y direction (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
Z0 Workpiece height (abs.) or incr. mm
∅ Diameter of spigot after machining mm
Z1 Depth of spigot (abs. or incr.) mm
DZ Max. depth infeed (Z direction) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in plane (spigot diameter) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (spigot base) mm
∅1 Diameter of premachined spigot mm
(important for determining approach position!)

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-172 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.8 Milling 3

3.8.6 Mill longitudinal slots

Function

You can use this cycle to face mill any type of longitudinal slot.
Approach: The tool approaches the slot center point on return plane
(RP) level in rapid traverse. It then feeds in to the safety clearance
(SC) in rapid traverse. The groove is then machined according the
selected insertion strategy allowing for the unfinished part dimensions.
Finishing: The pocket edge is always finished first, followed by the
pocket base. The tool traverses the slot only once when finishing the
edge. The slot edge is approached on the quadrant which joins the
corner radius. If the tool executes a depth infeed when finishing the
slot edge, it approaches the slot center point in the plane, executes the
new depth infeed in rapid traverse and approaches the start point of
the quadrant in rapid traverse.
When finishing the slot base, the tool rapidly approaches a position
corresponding to slot depth + finishing allowance + safety clearance
over the slot center point. It is then inserted vertically to slot depth at
the programmed depth infeed rate. The slot base is machined in a
single operation.

Select with softkeys Milling Slot Longitu-


dinal slot

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for a longitudinal slot

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-173
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.8 Milling 3

Parameters Description Unit

T, F, S, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".


Reference The reference point position must be defined:
point • Center point of longitudinal slot:
• Inside left
• Inside right
• Left-hand edge
• Right-hand edge
Machining type Roughing
Finishing
Single pos. A longitudinal slot is milled at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0).
Pos. pattern Several longitudinal slots are milled in a position pattern (e.g. full circle, pitch circle,
matrix, etc.).
The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 Position in X direction (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
Y0 Position in Y direction (single position only), abs. or incr. mm
Z0 Workpiece height, abs. or incr. mm
W Slot width mm
L Slot length mm
α0 Angle of rotation Degrees
Z1 Slot depth mm
DXY Max. infeed in plane (XY direction) mm
Alternatively, you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as a ratio Å plane infeed %
(mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm).
DZ Max. depth infeed (Z direction) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) mm
Insertion The tool can be inserted vertically over slot center (Mi) or with oscillating motion mm
(Pe):
Center=Insert vertically in center of longitudinal slot:
The tool is inserted to infeed depth in the pocket center.
Note: This setting can be used only if the cutter can cut across center.
Oscillation=Insert with oscillation along center axis of longitudinal slot:
The cutter center point oscillates along a linear path until it reaches the depth infeed.
Once it has reached the required depth, it traverses the path again without depth
infeed in order to eliminate the inclined insertion path.
FZ Depth infeed rate (for insertion in center only) mm/min
mm/tooth
EW Insertion angle (for oscillation only) Degrees

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-174 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.8 Milling 3
3.8.7 Mill circumferential slots on a full or pitch circle

Function

This cycle can be programmed to mill one or several circumferential


slots of equal size.
Approach 1st circumferential slot: The tool travels in rapid traverse
to safety clearance (SC) over the center point of the slot. It then
executes depth infeed at machining feedrate, allowing for the
maximum Z direction infeed and the finishing allowance. ShopMill also
applies the programmed machining direction (climb or conventional)
and machines the circumferential slot in a CW or CCW direction.
Approach further slots within the position pattern: The tool travels
to safety clearance (SC) at machining feedrate. It then approaches the
center point of the next slot at safety clearance level. It then executes
a depth infeed at machining feedrate.
Retraction: The tool travels to safety clearance (SC) at machining
feedrate. It then approaches the return plane (RP) in rapid traverse
and finally the tool change point.

Notes
You can also use the circumferential slot cycle to machine an annular
slot. In this case, the number (N) of slots must be 1 and the arc angle
α1 360°.

Select with softkeys Milling Slot Circumfe-


rential slot

You can toggle between the "Full circle" and "Pitch circle" positioning
patterns with softkey "Alternat.".

Select key
to call Help display

Help display for circumferential slot as full and pitch circle

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-175
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.8 Milling 3

Parameters Description Unit

T, F, S, V See Section "Program tool, offset value and spindle speed".


Machining type Roughing
Finishing
Full circle The slots are positioned around a full circle. The slot spacing is uniform and
calculated by the control.
The slots are positioned around a pitch circle. The slot spacing can be determined
Pitch circle on the basis of angle α2.
The positions refer to the center point:
X0 Position in X direction, abs. or incr. mm
Y0 Position in Y direction, abs. or incr. mm
Z0 Workpiece height, abs. or incr. mm
W Slot width mm
R Radius of circumferential slot mm
α0 Angle of rotation in relation to X axis Degrees
α1 Arc angle of a slot Degrees
α2 Advance angle (for pitch circle only) Degrees
N Number of slots
Z1 Depth of slot in relation to Z0 mm
DZ Max. depth infeed (Z direction) mm
UXY Finishing allowance in XY plane (edge of slot) mm

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-176 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.8 Milling 3
3.8.8 Use of position patterns for milling

Function

You can position any milling cycle, e.g. rectangular or circular pockets,
etc. using a position pattern. When you call the milling cycle, use
softkey "Alternat." to select "Pos. pattern" in the "Single position"
parameter field. The parameters for single positions X0, Y0 and Z0
then disappear from the display.

Extract from the parameter form of a rectangular pocket with "Pos. pattern" entry

After you have finished programming the cycle and stored it, you need
to program the position pattern.

Select with softkeys Drill Positions

ShopMill automatically chains the milling cycle and the subsequently


programmed position pattern.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-177
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.8 Milling 3

Programming example 1 You want to mill 12 mutually parallel rectangular pockets at an angle of 15
degrees. Arrangement on matrix: 4 columns, 3 rows.
Blank dimensions: X=115 mm, Y=80 mm, Z=30 mm
Rectangular pocket dimensions: Length 20 mm, width 10 mm, depth 8 mm
Corner radius 1.5 mm.
You have selected "Bottom left" as the pocket reference point.

Parameter input fields for rectangular pocket and position pattern

Programming graphic, rectangular pockets on matrix at angle of 15 degrees

Extract from machining plan; milling rectangular pockets on a matrix

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-178 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.8 Milling 3
Programming example 2 You want to rough cut 6 longitudinal slots on a full circle of Ø 32 mm.
The slots are rotated through 30 degrees.
Blank dimensions: X=100 mm, Y=100 mm, Z=20 mm
Slot dimensions: Length 28 mm, width 16 mm, depth 5 mm
You have selected "center point" as the slot reference point.

Parameter input fields for longitudinal slot and position pattern

Programming graphic, longitudinal slots at angle of 30 degrees on full circle

Extract from machining plan; milling longitudinal slots on a full circle

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-179
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.9 Measurements 3

3.9 Measurements

3.9.1 Workpiece zero point

Function

This function can be used to measure the zero point of a workpiece


and store it in the basic zero offset or in a settable zero offset
(max. 100 possible).

Select an axis with softkeys "X", "Y" or "Z".

Select with softkeys Misc. Workpiece


zero point >

Select key
to call Help display

Measurement of workpiece in X+ and X–

Measurement of workpiece in Y+ and Y–

Measurement of workpiece in Z

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-180 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.9 Measurements 3
Parameters Description Unit

T You must use a 3D probe.


X Approach position in X direction (abs.) mm
Y Approach position in Y direction (abs.) mm
Z Approach position in Z direction (abs.) mm
Zero off. You can set the following:
• Basic zero offset
• Settable zero offset
• GUD data: This option enables you to scan the measurement result in
GUD E_MEAS, e.g. for other calculations (tolerance checks, etc.).
Approach Plus (+): The probe approaches the workpiece in the plus direction
direction Minus (–): The probe approaches the workpiece in the minus direction
Note: If you have selected the approach position in the Z direction, this parameter
does not apply as the tool can only approach the workpiece in a negative direction!
X0, Y0, Z0 Workpiece edge mm

If several workpieces are to be machined, an offset may occur in one


or several directions when the workpiece is clamped. This offset can
be compensated by measuring the workpiece edge.

X0 new
Clamping
X0 old
on vise

Probe Workpiece

Offset

Workpiece clamping with offset in relation to previous clamping

If several workpieces are clamped on a machine table for machining in


parallel, the sensing probe can be used to measure one or several
workpiece edges so that the zero point for each workpiece can be
calculated.

Y
Probe
Workpiece 1 Workpiece 3

Workpiece 2 Workpiece 4

4 clamped workpieces

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-181
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.9 Measurements 3

3.9.2 Measure tool

Function

This function can calculate and monitor the wear on a tool. Before the
measuring cycle is called, the tool must be positioned above the tool
probe.

If the wear exceeds the value set in ∆L or ∆R, the tool is replaced and
disabled against further use. If no replacement tool is available, the
machining operation is interrupted.

ShopMill automatically executes the measurement with either a


rotating or stationary spindle depending on the tool type and selected
measurement method (measure radius/length).

Select with softkeys Misc. Measure Measure Measure


workpiece > radius or length

Select key
to call Help display

Measure the tool radius Measure the tool length

Parameters Description Unit

T Tool name
D Offset value for tool edge 1 or 2
V Lateral offset (incr) with length measurement mm
Longitudinal offset (incr.) with radius measurement mm
∆L Max. wear value (applies only to length measurement), see tool data sheet supplied mm
by tool manufacturer.
∆R Max. wear value (applies only to radius measurement), see tool data sheet supplied mm
by tool manufacturer.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-182 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.10 Miscellaneous functions 3
3.10 Miscellaneous functions

3.10.1 Subroutines and program section repeats

Subprogram If you require a section of a program to machine several workpieces, it


is advisable to write it as a separate routine. There is no difference
between subroutines and main programs in ShopMill.
If you have special requirements of a program section that you cannot
implement using a ShopMill cycle, you can write and test the section in
G code. You can then call it in ShopMill routines.

Misc. Sub-
Select with softkeys: routine

MMC 100.2: Select the required program type


• ShopMill
• G code

For MMC 103: Enter the path or workpiece name if


the desired subroutine is not stored in the workpiece directory where
you are writing the main program.

Enter the name of the subroutine that you want to insert under
Program Name. You can specify the file ending (*.mpf or *.spf) if
necessary. If you only enter the program name, the default ending is
added.

Note • You can program another subroutine call in the subroutine. The
maximum nesting depth is 8 subroutines.
• You should not insert subroutines among blocks chained by the
control.

Repeat program You can use this function to execute program blocks repeatedly
blocks without having to program them again.
Blocks to be repeated must be inserted between 2 so-called markers
(start and end markers). You must assign a unique name to each
marker. All programmed markers must have different names. The
name "Marker" appears as a default name in the marker field.
Misc. Set
Select with softkeys: marker

The marker is always inserted after the current block!

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-183
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.10 Miscellaneous functions 3

To execute marked program blocks again, you must program a


"repeat" instruction.

Misc. Repeat
Select with softkeys:

Enter the start and end markers.


Start marker: Name of marker identifying beginning of repeat
section.
End marker: Name of marker identifying end of repeat section.

Example

Machining plan with repeat of program section


N10 Start marker "begin"
N20 End marker "end"
N35 Repeat program section from "begin" to "end"

3.10.2 Alter the safety clearance or return plane

Function

This function allows you to program a new return plane or safety


clearance for the following program blocks. You can also use it to
change the machining direction. The function is modal and remains
valid until it is redefined.

Select with softkeys Misc. Settings


>

Note: The tool axis programmed in the program header cannot be


altered.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-184 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.10 Miscellaneous functions 3

3.10.3 Zero offsets

Function

After referencing, the actual value display is referred to the machine


zero of the machine coordinate system (MCS). The part program for
the workpiece refers to the workpiece zero of the workpiece
coordinate system (WCS).
The machine zero and workpiece zero do not have to be identical.
The distance between the machine zero and workpiece zero may vary
depending on the workpiece type and clamping method. This zero
offset is taken into account when the part program is processed.

There are two types of zero offset, i.e.


• settable zero offsets and
• programmable zero offsets

Settable zero offset Settable zero offsets are offsets which can be called from any
program. The offset and rotation values are preset by the operator and
stored in the control. They can be fetched from the zero offset list.

Programmable zero offset Programmable zero offsets are valid in the current program and refer
to settable zero offsets. A programmable zero offset can comprise
− an offset,
− a rotation,
− scaling and
− mirroring.

Further notes

The number of settable zero offsets (up to 100) is defined by a


machine data.
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-185
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.10 Miscellaneous functions 3

Operating sequence

Settable zero offset

In the program you have called, you can activate a settable zero offset
with ZO1 (G54) to ZO4 (G57) and other zero offsets (100 in total). You
can do this in the following way:

Select softkey "Alternat." to toggle between the basic offset and the
active zero offsets
or
Use the Edit key to enter the desired offset directly in the input field

and terminate the input by pressing the "Input" key.

Misc. Transfor- Zero


Select with softkeys: mations > offset >

YM
Y

X
ZO2

Y Y

X X
ZO1 ZO3

X
M

Zero offset in X and Y directions

Z0

Y1
Y0
Z1

X1

X0

Zero offset and rotation

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-186 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
3 3
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3.10 Miscellaneous functions

Programmable zero offsets

Translation You can program a zero offset for each axis in the direction of the
specified axis.

Misc. Transfor- Offset


Select with softkeys: mations > >

New offset

The last settable zero offset you entered (as absolute coordinate) acts
as the reference.

Additive offset

The currently active offset (additive) acts as the reference.

Examples
ad alin g
i ve
dit
Sc

additive

t
new Offse Rotation
new additive

New and additive offsets Offset, rotation and scaling

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-187
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.10 Miscellaneous functions 3

Rotation An angle of rotation can be set for each axis.

Misc. Transfor- Rotation


Select with softkeys: mations > >

New rotation

The last settable zero offset you entered (as absolute coordinate) acts as the
reference.

If a "new" rotation is active, an existing scaling is deactivated.

Additive rotation

The currently active rotation (additive) acts as a reference.

Example
Y

60°
45°
8
r7
40

7
35

12

30
10

X
20
55

Offset and rotation of workpieces in the X/Y plane

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-188 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.10 Miscellaneous functions 3
Scaling You can set a scaling factor for the X/Y plane and the tool axis. The
programmed values are multiplied by this factor.
The scaling always refers to the zero point of the workpiece.

If, for example, the size of a pocket is increased whose center point
does not coincide with the zero point, then the pocket center point is
shifted in the scaling.

Misc. Transfor- Scaling


Select with softkeys: mations > >

New scaling

The last settable zero offset you entered (as absolute coordinate) acts as the
reference.

If a "new" scaling is active, an existing rotation is deactivated.

Additive scaling

The currently active scaling (additive) acts as the reference.

Examples
Z

Y
ad al ing
i ve
di t
Sc

et
Offs Rotation
ne w additive

Scaling of a contour pocket in the X/Y plane and offset, rotation and scaling of a
workpiece.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-189
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.10 Miscellaneous functions 3

Mirroring Mirroring can be performed in relation to several axes simultaneously.

Misc. Transfor- Mirroring


Select with softkeys: mations > >

New mirroring

The last settable zero offset you entered (as absolute coordinate) acts as the
reference.

Additive mirroring

The currently active transformation (additive) acts as the reference.

Examples

gX Y
r in
rr o
Mi

Y X
in g
rr or
Mi

Mirroring in relation to X and Y axes

Mirroring on the X axis

The direction of travel of the cutting tool is also mirrored


(note machining direction (climb/conventional)).

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-190 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.10 Miscellaneous functions 3

3.10.4 Cylinder peripheral surface transformation

Function

The cylinder peripheral surface transformation is an option.


Cylinder peripheral surface transformation is required to machine
• longitudinal slots on cylindrical solids,
• cross slots on cylindrical solids,
• any other slot shapes on cylindrical bodies.

The shape of the slots is programmed with reference to the developed


level cylinder surface area. The slot can be programmed as a
line/circle contour, via drilling or milling cycles or with the contour
milling function (free contour programming).

There are two types of cylinder peripheral surface transformation:


• Slot side compensation off
• Slot side compensation on (path milling only)

Slot side compensation When slot side compensation is


OFF deactivated, any type of slot with
parallel sides can be machined if
the tool diameter equals the slot
width.
Longitudinal groove Cross groove
The slot sides are not parallel if the
slot width is larger than the tool Groove side compensation off

diameter.

The slot contour is programmed for machining purposes.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-191
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.10 Miscellaneous functions 3

Slot side compensation ON When slot side compensation is


active, slots with parallel sides are
machined even if the slot width is
larger than the tool diameter.

Longitudinal groove
limited in parallel, groove
side compensation on

The slot contour must not be programmed for machining purposes,


but the imaginary center-point path of a bolt inserted in the slot; the
bolt must be in contact with all sides of the slot. The slot width is
determined by parameter D (see also Section "Example 5: Slot side
compensation".)

Programming The basic programming procedure is as follows:

1. Select zero offset for cylinder surface transformation (e.g. offset


the zero point on the center point of the cylinder end face)
2. Position the Y axis (Y axis must be positioned prior to cylinder
surface transformation because it is defined differently after
transformation)
3. Activate cylinder peripheral surface transformation
4. Select zero offset for machining on developed cylinder surface
(e.g. shift zero point to the zero point on the workpiece drawing)
5. Program machining operation (e.g. enter contour and path milling)
6. Deactivate cylinder peripheral surface transformation

The programmed cylinder peripheral surface transformation is


simulated only as a developed peripheral surface.

The zero offsets active prior to selection of cylinder surface


transformation are no longer active after the function has been
deselected.

Select with softkeys Misc. Transfor- Cylinder


mations > surface >

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-192 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.10 Miscellaneous functions 3
Parameters Description Unit

Transformation Activate/deactivate cylinder peripheral surface transformation (see also example


below)
∅ Cylinder diameter (only when transformation is active) mm
Slot side comp. Activate/deactivate slot side compensation (only when transformation is active)
D Offset to the programmed path (only mm
when slot side compensation is active)

Options for free contour programming


General For contours (e.g. slots) on a cylinder, lengths in the circumferential
direction of the cylinder peripheral surface (e.g. Y axis) are often
specified as angles.
Several options are available under the "Mill contour" function in free
contour programming for this purpose.
Depending on the selected axis (selection is made via a display
machine data), you can enter the length as an angle.

Start point In the screen form for selecting the start point, you can also activate or
deactivate the cylinder peripheral surface transformation function via
the "Alternat." softkey. When the function is active, you are offered
diameter ∅ of the cylinder.

Contour elements Depending on the axis and the relevant element, angle parameters
Xα, Iα or Yα, Jα are added to screenforms
"Horizontal/vertical/diagonal line" and "Arc" when the cylinder
peripheral surface transformation function is active.

Notes
• The dimensions of the developed surface are specified in mm in
the graphic!
• You must delete the Y value before you can enter an angular value
for Yα in the start screen form.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-193
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.10 Miscellaneous functions 3

3.10.5 Swiveling

Function

If you wish to create or machine inclined planes, you can swivel the
machining coordinate system. Swivel heads or tables are used for this
purpose.

The swiveling function can be used only if the zero offset has been set
in the unswiveled state (rotary axis positions in MCS/WCS =0). When
the coordinate system is swiveled, the previously set zero offset is
automatically converted for the swiveled state.

The basic programming procedure is as follows:

1. Swivel the coordinate system into the plane to be machined.


2. Program the machining operation for the unswiveled plane.
3. Swivel coordinate system back to its original position.

Please note the following when traversing the tool axes:


• Retract the tool axis in such a manner that the tool and workpiece
cannot collide when it swivels.
• If a program has been interrupted in the swiveled state, it is
possible to remove the tool from an inclined hole by retracting it in
the Z+ direction during NC Stop in Jog mode. This is no longer
possible after an NC Reset.

The coordinate system can be swiveled either axially or via solid or


projection angles. A machine data determines which swiveling variants
are available.
• With the axial swiveling variant, the coordinate system is rotated
about the individual axes sequentially, which each rotation
commencing directly from the previous rotation. The axis sequence
is freely selectable.
• With the swiveling variant based on solid angles, the coordinate
system is rotated first about the Z axis and then about the Y axis.
The second rotation commences directly from the first.
• The projection angle variant involves swiveling the coordinate
system about the individual axes sequentially; the sequence of
axes is freely selectable. The first two rotations refer in each case
to the initial state, the last rotation commences directly from the
previous two.

The positive direction of rotation for each of the different swivel


variants can be found in the Help displays.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-194 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
3 3
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3.10 Miscellaneous functions

In swivel systems with 2 rotary axes, a particular position can be


reached in two different ways, i.e. either via a CW or a CCW rotation.
The geometry of the swivel head or table is such that the head or table
assumes two different positions depending on the selected direction.
This may affect the working area. You can choose between these two
different positions in the "Direction" parameter. If one of the two
positions cannot be reached for mechanical reasons, the alternative
position is automatically selected irrespective of the setting of the
"Direction" parameter.

To avoid collisions, you can leave the position of the tool tip
unchanged during swiveling. Please refer to information supplied by
the machine manufacturer to find out whether this function is available.

The "Measure workpiece" and "Measure tool" functions are not


operative in a swiveled plane.

Select with softkeys Misc. Transfor- Swivelling


mations >

Select key
to call Help display

Reference point of rotation Axial swivel

Swivel solid angle Swivel projection angle

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-195
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.10 Miscellaneous functions 3

Zero point of rotated surface

Parameters Description Unit

TC Name of swivel data block


0: Remove inclinable head
–: No change to set swivel data block
T Tool name
Transformation Transformation (swiveling) additive or new
X0 Reference point for rotation mm
Y0 Reference point for rotation mm
Z0 Reference point for rotation mm
Swiveling Axial swiveling, or swiveling via solid or projection angle
X Axis angle (axial swivel) The sequence of axes Degrees
Y Axis angle (axial swivel) can be changed round Degrees
Z Axis angle (axial swivel) as required Degrees
α Angle of rotation in the XY plane about the Z axis (swiveling via solid angle) Degrees
β Angle of rotation in space about the Y axis (swiveling via solid angle) Degrees
Xα Axis angle (swiveling via projection angle) The sequence of axes Degrees
Yα Axis angle (swiveling via projection angle) can be changed round Degrees
Zβ Axis angle (swiveling via projection angle) as required Degrees
X1 New zero point of rotated surface mm
Y1 New zero point of rotated surface mm
Z1 New zero point of rotated surface mm
Direction Preferred direction of rotation with 2 alternatives
+: Larger angle of 2nd axis on the scale of the swivel head/table
–: Smaller angle of the 2nd axis on the scale of the swivel head/table
Fix tool tip Correct: The position of the tool tip is maintained during swiveling.
Do not correct: The position of the tool tip is changes during swiveling.

Other additive transformations can be added to the offsets before


(X0, Y0, Z0) or after (X1, Y1, Z1) swiveling (see Section "Zero
offsets").

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-196 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.10 Miscellaneous functions 3
Programming example You want to bevel a corner on a cube.

The machining plane is to be the inclined surface, i.e. the machining


plane must be swiveled as follows:

• With axial swiveling and swiveling using solid angles, the system
of coordinates is rotated first in the XY plane in such a way that
the upper edge of the inclined surface of the cube runs parallel
to the X axis (rotate 45° about Z axis or α=45°). The system of
coordinates is then tilted so that the inclined plane of the cube is
in the XY plane (rotate –54.736° about Y axis or β=54.736°).
• With the swiveling via projection angles options, the X and Y axes
are rotated through 45° so that the inclined plane of the cube is in
the XY plane. The Z axis is then rotated through 30° so that the
X axis runs through the center point of the inclined surface (zero
point of rotated surface).
Z
Workpiece Y
zero
X

30°
Zero point
of rotated 45°
45° area

Reference
point for
rotation
View of left-hand side

50

54.736°
50

50
25

45°
25

25
Plan view A View A

Workpiece machined by an inclinable head

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-197
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.10 Miscellaneous functions 3

Swivel (axial) Swivel (solid angle) Swivel (projection angle)

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-198 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.10 Miscellaneous functions 3

3.10.6 Define a new blank

Function

A new blank can be defined within ShopMill programs to allow the


visible section to be modified during simulation. This is useful for the
zero offset, cylinder peripheral surface transformation and swiveling
functions.

Program the functions listed above before you define a new blank.

Operating sequence

Misc. Settings Select softkeys "Miscellaneous" and "Settings". Enter the desired
>
values under corner point 1 and corner point 2 or dimensions (see
also Section "Create a new program; define a blank").

The new blank definitions are stored in the ShopMill program.

If you are machining exclusively in a swiveled plane, for example, the


required blank dimensions can also be entered directly in the program
header.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-199
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.11 Insert G code in a ShopMill program 3

3.11 Insert G code in a ShopMill program

Function

You have the option of inserting G code blocks/comments in a


ShopMill program in the ShopMill operator interface.

A G code block can be programmed according to DIN 66025.


Please refer to the following Programming Guide for an exact
description of G code blocks to DIN 66025:
"SINUMERIK 810D/840D/FM-NC Fundamentals".

Operating sequence

Precondition A program has been created under "Programs/New/ShopMill


Program".
Insert a G code block
Select with softkey G code
block

This softkey inserts a G code block in the program. You can now edit
the selected G code block. Press the "Input" key to terminate one
G code block and create a new one.

Insert comment Comments are used to document the program. Individual blocks within
a program can be explained by comments.
A semi-colon (;) is inserted in front of the comment text to mark the
comment beginning. A comment block is terminated with the "Input"
key.

Example

Example of a program with G code and comment

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-200 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with ShopMill
3 3.11 Insert G code in a ShopMill program 3
Cursor control in the
G code block

You can position the cursor in a line or move from G code block to
G code block using the cursor keys.

Press the "Delete" key to delete the character selected with the cursor.
Del
Further notes
• You cannot insert a G code block before the program header or
after the program end.
• You cannot program a G code block within a chain of program
blocks.
• G code blocks are not displayed in the programming graphic.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 3-201
Programming with ShopMill 08.00
3 3.11 Insert G code in a ShopMill program 3

Notes

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


3-202 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with G Code
4 4
Programming with G Code

4.1 Create a G code program ....................................................................................... 4-204

4.2 R parameters (arithmetic parameters).................................................................... 4-207

4.3 User data ................................................................................................................ 4-208

4.4 ISO dialects............................................................................................................. 4-211

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 4-203
Programming with G Code 08.00
4 4.1 Create a G code program 4

4.1 Create a G code program

Function

You have the option of creating your own G code program in the G
code editor on the ShopMill operator interface.

A G code block can be programmed according to DIN 66025.


For an exact description of G code blocks to DIN 66025, please refer
to
/PG/, Programming Guide Fundamentals
/PGZ/, Programming Guide Cycles.

The G code program is stored in the "Program Manager" directory.

Select with softkeys Program New G code


Manager > program

Enter a program name Enter a program name.

Program names may be a maximum of 24 characters in length.


You can use any letters, digits or the underscore symbol (_).
Lower case is automatically changed to upper case.

Confirm the program name by pressing

or

The G code editor is then opened.

The editor offers the following functions:


• Transfer a tool from the tool list
• Mark
• Copy/Delete/Insert
• Seach/Replace
• Number NC block
• Simulate a part program
• Execute a part program

Part programs or sections of part programs can be edited in the


G code editor only if the relevant blocks have not yet been executed.
Editable blocks are specially highlighted.
A part program can be edited completely when selected or in the
"Reset" state.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


4-204 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with G Code
4 4.1 Create a G code program 4
Operating sequence

Insert a tool
Tools
Select softkey "Tools" to go to the tool list.
Position the cursor on the tool you want to transfer.
To Transfer the tool to the G code editor by selecting softkey
program
"To program".
Text such as the example below is displayed at the current cursor
position: T=MILL10

When you select the "ETC" key, all the following functions are
> displayed in the vertical softkey menu:
Edit part program

Mark This softkey marks the beginning of a block.


Position the cursor at the block end. The block is automatically
selected.

Copy This softkey copies the selected block into a clipboard. The block
remains stored in the clipboard, even when you change to another part
program.

Insert This softkey inserts the cut or copied block from the clipboard in the
text after the cursor.

Delete Deletes the selected block.

Search

Search/ This softkey displays a new vertical softkey menu. You can choose
Replace >
between "Search" and "Search/Replace".

Search Select softkey "Search". Enter the string you wish to find and confirm
your input with "OK". The part program is searched in a forwards
direction until the string is found. The search result is marked by the
Find next cursor in the editor. You can continue the search by selecting softkey
"Find next".

Search/ Select softkey "Search/Replace". Enter the string you wish to find and
Replace >
the replacement string and confirm your input with "OK". The part
program is searched in a forwards direction until the string is found.
The search result is marked by the cursor in the editor.
Find next Replace You can select whether you wish the search to continue, replace the
string or do a global search and replace on the entire part program.
Replace
all

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 4-205
Programming with G Code 08.00
4 4.1 Create a G code program 4
Positioning

Re- The following functions are defined in the "Renumber" input window:
number >
• Block number incrementation (e.g. 1’s, 5’s, 10’s)
• Number of the first block
You can cancel the numbering again by entering 0 as the
incrementation or first block number.

This softkey deselects the vertical softkey menu.

Simulate a part program

Simula- This simulates the part program. The functions "Zoom Origin",
tion
"Zoom +", Zoom –" and "Zoom Auto" are available (see Section
"Zoom a finished part viewport").

Execute a part program

Machine The part program is called in "Machine Auto" (Automatic) mode. You
from here
can start the part program with NC Start.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


4-206 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with G Code
4 4.2 R parameters (arithmetic parameters) 4

4.2 R parameters (arithmetic parameters)

Function

R parameters are read and written by the G code programs. They can
be manually altered.

Operating sequence

Tool The R parameter list is displayed via the "Tool Offset" key
Offset

Tools or via softkey "Tools ZO".


ZO

R para- This opens the R parameter list.


meters

You can page up and down with the "Paging" keys.

Find an R parameter
Find This softkey opens the "Find an R parameter" input window.

Enter the parameter number you want to find.

Press the "Accept" softkey to display the R parameter found by the


search function.

Closes the "Find" window.

Edit an R parameter
Position the cursor bar on the relevant input field and enter the values.

Delete an R parameter
Position the cursor bar on the relevant input field and delete the values
Del
with the "Delete" key.

Further notes

Input and deletion of R parameters can be disabled via the keyswitch.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 4-207
Programming with G Code 08.00
4 4.3 User data 4

4.3 User data


Function

User data can be defined by several different variable types:


• Global variables (GUD) which are applicable in all programs.
• Local variables (LUD) which are valid only in the program or
subroutine in which they were defined.
• Program-global variables (PUD) are generated from the local
variables (LUD) defined in the main program as a function of a
machine data setting.
Program-global variables are thus valid on all subroutine levels on
which they can also be read and written.

SW 4.3 and earlier


Global user data (GUD) should be defined as part of the start-up
process as they require re-initialization of the control system.

SW4.4 and later:


User data (GUD) can be defined for the MMC103 without re-
initialization.
The following applies:
• Definition files that are on the hard disk are not active.
• Definition files that are on the NC are always active.

The user memory size must be configured large enough to hold the
GUD definition file before it is loaded to the control.
All relevant machine data contain the letters GUD in their name.

Further notes
The display of global user data (GUD) can be disabled by means of
keyswitch or password.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


4-208 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with G Code
4 4.3 User data 4
Find/edit user data/variables

Operating sequence

Press softkey "User data".


User data
The "Program-specific user data" window is opened.
The vertical softkey menu changes.

Global You have the option of switching between windows


user data
• "Global user data" (GUD)

Chan. spec. • "Channel-specific user data" (CHUD) and


user data

Local • "Local user data" (LUD).


user data
The name and value of the current user data are displayed in each
case.

Program • "Program user data"


user data
This softkey displays program-global (PUD) and local variable (LUD)
user data.

You can page up and down in the list using the "Paging keys".

Edit user data


Position the cursor on the user data that you wish to edit and enter a
new value or
select a new value via the "Toggle" key.
The new values are transferred directly.

Find user data

GUD + GUD – You can scroll through the user data GUD 1 to GUD 9 using softkeys
"GUD +" to "GUD –".

CHUD + CHUD –
The same applies to softkeys "CHUD +" to "CHUD –" .

GUD: This opens the "Select global user data" window. You can make the
following settings:
• 1 = SGUD (Siemens)
• 2 = MGUD (Machine Manufacturer)
• 3 = UGUD (Machine User)
• 4 ... 9 = GUD4 ... GUD9
CHUD:
The same applies to "CHUD".

The selected user data are displayed in the "Global user data" window.

Find
Press softkey "Find".
Dialog box "Find user data" is displayed.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 4-209
Programming with G Code 08.00
4 4.3 User data 4
You can look for the name or character strings contained in the name.
The cursor is positioned on the user data found by the search.

Continue The next user data with the specified initial identifier is displayed.
search
Only the local user data still stored in the processing sequence on the
control are displayed.

The list of displayed local user data are updated with every "NC Stop",
but the display values are refreshed continually.
Before global user data definitions can become effective in the control,
it might be necessary to set the corresponding machine data.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


4-210 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Programming with G Code
4 4.4 ISO dialects 4

4.4 ISO dialects


Function

ISO dialect0 M programs (Fanuc0 milling) can also be executed under


ShopMill. These are read in and out via the V.24 interface.

Operating sequence

Read in An ISO dialect0 M program is read in by the same method as a


ShopMill program.
ISO dialect0 M programs which you read in are stored as main
programs in the ShopMill directory.

Execute Before you can execute an ISO dialect0 M program, you must make
the following settings:
1. A tool offset data set (geometry and wear data) must be assigned
to every H number in the ISO dialect0 M program.
Add the tool geometry data in column "H" of the tool list with the
appropriate H number. Each data set must have a unique H
number; only replacement tools may have the same H number as
another set.
2. Each ISO dialect0 M program must be preceded by command
"G291". Command "G290" marks a return to the Siemens program.

You can display specific ISO dialect G functions by selecting softkey


"G functions".

Read out An ISO dialect0 M program is read out by the same method as a
ShopMill program.
Select punched tape/ISO format as the output format.

You can view the assignments between Siemens zero offsets and
ISO dialect0 M zero offsets in a table.
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 4-211
Programming with G Code 08.00
4 4.4 ISO dialects 4

Notes

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


4-212 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Simulation
5 5
Simulation

5.1 General ................................................................................................................... 5-214

5.2 Start/abort program................................................................................................. 5-214

5.3 Representation as a plan view................................................................................ 5-215

5.4 Representation as a 3-plane view........................................................................... 5-216

5.5 Zoom a finished part viewport................................................................................. 5-217

5.6 Three-dimensional representation of finished part ................................................. 5-218


5.6.1 Change position of finished part ............................................................................. 5-218
5.6.2 Cut open finished part............................................................................................. 5-219
5.6.3 Update finished part display.................................................................................... 5-219

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 5-213
Simulation 08.00
5 5.1 General 5

5.1 General
Function

To simulate the machining process, the control system completely


calculates the currently selected program and displays the result in
graphic form.

You can select the following modes of representation for simulation:

• Plan view
• 3-plane view
• Volume model

The simulation function displays tools and workpiece contours in their


correct proportions.

5.2 Start/abort program

Function

Start program
Precondition You have selected the program you want to simulate, i.e.
• a ShopMill program or a
• G code program
and called it in the Program Editor.

Simula- Press softkey "Simulation".


tion
In the case of ShopMill programs, the dimensions of the blank for
simulation are taken from the program header. With G code
programs, you must specify the dimensions of the blank or the
selected viewport yourself.
Settings With a G code program, select softkey "Settings" and enter the
dimensions of your choice (see also Section "Create a new program;
define a blank").
These dimensions are stored for simulation of the next G code
program. If you set the "Blank" parameter to "off", the dimensions will
be deleted.

Starts the program.

Processing time The processing time (in hours/minutes/seconds) indicates the


approximate time that would actually be required to execute the
machining program on the machine (incl. tool change).
The timer is stopped if the program is interrupted.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


5-214 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Simulation
5 5.3 Representation as a plan view 5
Abort program
Interrupt the simulation with the "back" softkey.

Simula- The program is restarted when you press softkey "Simulation".


tion

5.3 Representation as a plan view

Function

You can display the contour as a plan view by pressing this softkey.
A depth display indicates the current depth at which machining is
currently taking place.
The following applies with respect to depth display in this graphic:
"The deeper, the darker".

Select with softkey Plan view

Example of a plan view display of a finished part:

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 5-215
Simulation 08.00
5 5.4 Representation as a 3-plane view 5

5.4 Representation as a 3-plane view

Function

The process is represented as a plan view with 2 sections, similar to a


technical drawing.
Functions for zooming viewports are provided in the 3-plane view.

Select with softkey

Example of a 3-plane view of a finished part:

Shift cutting planes The cross-hair can be positioned in the plan view to display the cutting
plane in the respective side view. Example of a volume model
(finished part):

To reveal concealed contours, you can shift the cutting planes to any
position you want in the 3-plane display.

Shift with keys ...


in the ...
y plane

x plane

z plane

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


5-216 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Simulation
5 5.5 Zoom a finished part viewport 5

5.5 Zoom a finished part viewport

Function

Functions for displaying a more detailed representation of a finished


part are available

• in the plane view and


• in the 3-plane display.

Select with softkey Details

Zoom a viewport Softkeys/keys Meaning


To You return to the initial display
origin

Zoom You can use softkey "Zoom +" or "Zoom –" to


+
display the current screen contents in a higher or
Zoom lower resolution. Use the cursor or "Paging" keys

to position the cross-hair in the centre of the
selected viewport.

Note:
The same functions are provided by the "Plus" and
"Minus" keys on the operator panel.

Auto Press this softkey to display a window-


Zoom
proportionate representation of all travel paths in
the graphic display area.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 5-217
Simulation 08.00
5 5.6 Three-dimensional representation of finished part 5

5.6 Three-dimensional representation of finished part

Function

The finished part is displayed as a volume model. The simulation


window displays the current machining status.
You can display concealed contours and views on the volume model
by
• changing the position about the vertical axis or
• cutting open the volume model at the desired point.

Select with softkey

Example of a volume model (finished part):

5.6.1 Change position of finished part


Select with softkey Details

Select views You can select one of the following views:

Left-hand side of part from front

Right-hand side of part from front

Right-hand side of part from rear

Left-hand side of part from rear

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


5-218 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Simulation
5 5.6 Three-dimensional representation of finished part 5

5.6.2 Cut open finished part


Precondition You have selected one side of the finished part.

Select with softkey

Shift cutting planes To make concealed contours visible, shift the cutting planes using the
cursor and "Paging" keys (see also Section "Representation in 3-plane
view") to any position.

Update The new setting is updated when you select this softkey.

Example of a cut volume model (finished part):

5.6.3 Update finished part display


Precondition You are in "Volume model" representation mode and have started the
program.
Update While you are testing the program, the 3D representation of the
finished part is refreshed to correspond to the latest machining status
every time you press softkey "Update".

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 5-219
Simulation 08.00
5 5.6 Three-dimensional representation of finished part 5

Notes

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


5-220 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 File Management
6 6
File Management

6.1 Function .................................................................................................................. 6-222

6.2 Directory structure................................................................................................... 6-222

6.3 "Directory" operating area (MMC 100.2) ................................................................. 6-224


6.3.1 Select a file ............................................................................................................. 6-224
6.3.2 Create a file............................................................................................................. 6-224
6.3.3 Execute a program ................................................................................................. 6-225
6.3.4 Copy/rename files ................................................................................................... 6-225
6.3.5 Delete files .............................................................................................................. 6-225
6.3.6 Set up the V.24 interface ........................................................................................ 6-226
6.3.7 Execute a program via the V.24 ............................................................................. 6-227
6.3.8 Multiple clamping .................................................................................................... 6-228
6.3.9 Back up tool/zero point data ................................................................................... 6-230
6.3.10 Read in tool/zero point data .................................................................................... 6-231
6.3.11 Read out files .......................................................................................................... 6-232
6.3.12 Read in files ............................................................................................................ 6-233
6.3.13 Error log .................................................................................................................. 6-233

6.4 "Directory" operating area (MMC 103) .................................................................... 6-234


6.4.1 Basic display ........................................................................................................... 6-234
6.4.2 Create files/directories ............................................................................................ 6-236
6.4.3 Open files/directories .............................................................................................. 6-237
6.4.4 Load and unload programs ..................................................................................... 6-237
6.4.5 Select several programs ......................................................................................... 6-239
6.4.6 Copy/rename/insert files/directories ....................................................................... 6-239
6.4.7 Delete/move files/directories................................................................................... 6-240
6.4.8 Execute from hard disk ........................................................................................... 6-240
6.4.9 Set up the V.24 interface ........................................................................................ 6-241
6.4.10 Multiple clamping .................................................................................................... 6-242
6.4.11 Back up tool/zero point data ................................................................................... 6-244
6.4.12 Read in tool/zero point data .................................................................................... 6-245
6.4.13 Read out files .......................................................................................................... 6-246
6.4.14 Read in files ............................................................................................................ 6-246
6.4.15 Error log .................................................................................................................. 6-247

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 6-221
File Management 08.00
6 6.1 Function 6

6.1 Function

The "Directory" operating area offers the following functions:


• Read in/out of programs
• Management of programs in the NC user memory and data
management directory on the hard disk, on a floppy disk drive and
on network drives

6.2 Directory structure

All files are stored in a directory structure.

MMC 100.2
ShopMill operator interface
MMC100.2
V.24

Display
Edit Edit
data

Channel 1 Axes
ShopMill programs
ShopMill subroutines
NC
G code programs
user memory

Programs are always stored in the NC where they can be edited


directly.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


6-222 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 File Management
6 6.2 Directory structure 6

MMC 103
ShopMill operator interface
MMC103
V.24

Display
Edit Edit Edit
data

ShopMill prog. Chan. 1 Axes


ShopMill prog. ShopMill prog.
ShopMill subroutine ShopMill subroutine ShopMill subroutine
G code prog. Edit G code prog. Load G code prog.

Data management Unload


Network drive
directory S tore
Floppy disk drive NC user memory
on hard disk

• ShopMill with an MMC 103 operator interface has its own hard disk
in addition to the NC main memory. As a result, any program that is
not needed in the NC can be stored on hard disk. Programs are
sorted in file-tree form in directories.

• On the MMC 103 operator interface with ShopMill, it is also


possible to set up a floppy disk drive and other network drives in
the directory management. Please read the machine
manufacturer’s instruction manual!

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 6-223
File Management 08.00
6 6.3 "Directory" operating area (MMC 100.2) 6

6.3 "Directory" operating area (MMC 100.2)

6.3.1 Select a file

Operating sequence

Program P rog ram


Select with softkey or the "Program Manager" key.
M an ager
Manager or

File information The following information is displayed:

Name:
Files which are stored in the directory

Size:
Size of file in bytes

Date:
Date on which the file was created or last modified.

Select and call a file

Select the file you want using the cursor keys.

Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.


or

The selected file is displayed in the "Program" operating area.

6.3.2 Create a file

Function

This subsection describes how new programs can be created.

Operating sequence

Program "Directory" operating area is selected.


Manager
The current program overview is displayed.
New Once you have pressed the "New" softkey, you can
• create a ShopMill program (see Section
"Create a ShopMill program")
• or a G code program (see Section "Programming G code").
Enter a name for the new program and confirm your input.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


6-224 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 File Management
6 6.3 "Directory" operating area (MMC 100.2) 6
6.3.3 Execute a program

Function

This subsection describes how to execute a program.

Operating sequence

Precondition You have selected a file.

Execute Press softkey "Execute".


You then change over to the "Machine Auto" operating area.

6.3.4 Copy/rename files

Operating sequence

Precondition You have selected a file.

Copy Press softkey "Copy"


or
Rename select the "Rename" softkey.

Enter a new file name in the "To:" field and confirm with the "Input"
key.

You can rename a file if it is not currently selected and being


processed in "Auto" mode or if the new name has not yet been used.

6.3.5 Delete files

Operating sequence

Precondition The file to be deleted is selected.

Delete Press softkey "Delete".

Confirm the delete operation.

Abort delete operation.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 6-225
File Management 08.00
6 6.3 "Directory" operating area (MMC 100.2) 6
6.3.6 Set up the V.24 interface

Function

You can send files to an external data backup device (e.g. PG/PC,
printer), or read them in (e.g. PG/PC) via the V.24 interface. You must
set the appropriate parameters for the V.24 interface and your data
backup device. The control offers you a suitable input screen form in
which you can define the specific data for your device.

Operating sequence

Precondition "Program Manager" operating area is selected.

Continue Read out Select one of the softkeys for the V.24 interface. The softkey remains
>>
highlighted for check purposes:
Read in

V.24 Press softkey "V.24 settings" to display the "Parameterization V.24


settings
user" screen form. Assign the parameters in this screen form.

Position the cursor bar on the input fields and enter the necessary
values.

The values for parameters "Interface", "Protocol", "Baud rate",


or "Data bits", "Parity" and "Stop bits" can be selected with the toggle key
or "Alternat." softkey.

You can also activate or deactivate special functions with the


"toggle key" or the "Alternat." softkey.

Notes
Make sure that you set the correct file format (binary/PC, punched
tape or punched tape/ISO format).

This softkey closes the "Parameterization V.24 user" screen form.

The modified data are stored.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


6-226 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 File Management
6 6.3 "Directory" operating area (MMC 100.2) 6

6.3.7 Execute a program via the V.24

Function

Programs stored externally can be executed via the V.24 interface.


If a program needs more memory space for execution than is
available in the NC main memory, for example, then you can load the
program contents continuously via the V.24 interface.

Operating sequence

Precondition "Program Manager" operating mode is selected.

Select the program you want to execute.

Continue Execute Select softkeys "Continue" and "Execute V.24".


>> V.24
The program contents are loaded continuously to the NC main
memory while the program is being processed.

Press the "NC Start" key.

The program remains in the external storage medium when


"Execute from V.24" is active.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 6-227
File Management 08.00
6 6.3 "Directory" operating area (MMC 100.2) 6

6.3.8 Multiple clamping

Function

You can machine several workpieces at the same time by using the
"Multiple clamping" function. You can either execute the same
program several times or select several different machining programs.
The "Multiple clamping" function is an option.

The multiple clamping function creates one single program from


several different programs. This includes optimization of tool changes
in order to reduce machining times. The tool sequence within a
program remains unchanged. Cycles are not opened, position patterns
are processed as closed units.

The individual programs must meet the following requirements:

• ShopMill programs only


• Program must have been tested
• No markers/repetitions, i.e. no branches in the program
• No inch/metric switchover
• No transformations
• Contours must have unique names, i.e. the same contour name
must not be called in several different programs
• Max. of 50 contours per clamping
• Max. (99 start ZO) clampings

Operating sequence

Program Program
Select the "Program Manager" key or softkey.
Manager or
Manager

Multiple Select softkey "Multiple clamping" in the extended softkey menu.


clamping
Enter the number of clampings and the number of the first zero offset
to be used. The clampings are processed in ascending sequence from
the start zero offset. The zero offsets are defined in the "Tools/Zero
Offsets" menu (see Section "Zero offsets").
Enter a name for the new, global program (XYZ.MPF) and confirm
with "OK".
A list is displayed in which the different programs must be assigned to
the zero offsets.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


6-228 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 File Management
6 6.3 "Directory" operating area (MMC 100.2) 6
Program Go to the program overview by selecting softkey "Program selection".
selection
Select the program you want and select softkey "OK".
Repeat this process until a program is assigned to every zero offset.

On all If you wish to execute the same program on all clampings, select
clampings
softkey "On all clampings" after you have selected the program.
You can assign different programs to individual zero offsets first, and
then assign one program to the remaining zero offsets by selecting
softkey "On all clampings".

Delete Delete all You can clear individual or all programs from the assignment list again
selection
by means of softkeys "Delete selection" and "Delete all".

Calculate When you have completed the assignment list, select softkey
program
"Calculate program". This optimizes the tool changes.
The global program is then renumbered. The number of the current
clamping is specified every time the program switches from one
clamping to another.

• Apart from the global program (XYZ.MPF), the file XYZ_MCD.INI


is also set up in which the assignment between zero offsets and
programs is stored.
• If you switch from the assignment list (without "Abort" or "Create
program") to another function and then call the "Multiple clamping"
function later on, the same assignment list is displayed again.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 6-229
File Management 08.00
6 6.3 "Directory" operating area (MMC 100.2) 6

6.3.9 Back up tool/zero point data

Function

You can use the "Back up data" function to save the tool offset and
zero point data which are associated with a program or stored in the
tool management system.

Operating sequence

Position the cursor on the relevant program in the directory.

Continue Back up Select softkey "Back up data" in the extended softkey menu.
>> data

Select whether and which tool offset data and zero offsets you wish to
save. With "All used in program", all the tools or zero offsets used in a
particular program will be backed up; "Complete tool list" or "All" will
back up all the data from the tool management system. You can also
read out the associated magazine assignments and basic zero offset
at the same time.

You cannot read out the magazine assignments with the


"Tool management without loading/unloading" option.

Change the default file name ("Name_TMZ") if necessary.


If a file with the selected program name already exists, you can
overwrite or rename the file.

When you select "OK", the data are stored in the same directory as
the selected program.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


6-230 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 File Management
6 6.3 "Directory" operating area (MMC 100.2) 6

6.3.10 Read in tool/zero point data

Function

You can use the "Read in data" function to read in the tool offset and
zero point data stored for a program.

Operating sequence

Position the cursor on the file containing the tool/zero point data
("Name_TMZ") in the directory.

Execute Select the "Execute" softkey, the "Input" key or the "Cursor right" key.

Select which data (tool offset data, magazine assignments, zero point
data, basic zero offset) you wish to read in.
Confirm your selection with "OK".

With respect to reading in data, please note the following:


• If all tool offset data need to be read in, the tool management is
deleted first and the backup data then read in.
• If all the tool data used in the program are read in and a particular
tool already exists in the tool management, then you can choose
between the following options:
Replace All tool data used in the program are read in, i.e. existing tools are
all
overwritten without further warning.

Replace The data read-in operation is aborted.


none
The old tool is retained.

The old tool is overwritten.


With the tool management option without loading/unloading, the
old tool is deleted; in the case of the "with loading/unloading"
variant, the old tool is unloaded beforehand.
If you change the tool name with "Yes" before the data are
transferred, the tool is also entered in the tool list.

• Existing zero offsets are always overwritten when data are read in.
• If the magazine assignments are not read in with the other data,
the tools are entered without location number in the tool list.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 6-231
File Management 08.00
6 6.3 "Directory" operating area (MMC 100.2) 6

6.3.11 Read out files

Function

You can read out one or more files via the V.24 interface.

• When you select one single file, the ShopMill subroutines included
in the program are transferred at the same time.

• When you select more than one file, only the selected files are
transferred.

When reading out files to an external storage medium, please note the
output formats and device settings of the V.24 interface.

Operating sequence

Position the cursor on the file you wish to read out in the directory.

Continue Read out Press softkey "Read out".


>>
Start the data storage device.

Start
Press softkey "Start".

The selected file and all its ShopMill subroutines are read out.

The "Readout" window displays the name of the file and the number of
transferred bytes.

Stop
You can abort the data output by pressing softkey "Stop".

All You can select all files stored in the directory by pressing softkey
files
"All files".

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


6-232 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 File Management
6 6.3 "Directory" operating area (MMC 100.2) 6

6.3.12 Read in files

Operating sequence

Precondition The interface for your data storage device is correctly selected.

Continue Read in Press softkey "Read in".


>>

Start
When you press softkey "Start", the data are read in and stored in the
specified path.
The system automatically detects whether the file to be read in is in
binary/PC, punched tape or punched tape/ISO format.
The names of the imported files and the number of transferred bytes
are displayed on the screen.

Start the data storage device.

Stop
You can abort the data import by pressing softkey "Stop".

Start
To restart the data import process, press softkey "Start" again. You
must also start the data storage device again at the same time.

6.3.13 Error log

Function

Select the error log

Error log By pressing softkey "Error log", you can display information about the
data transfer operation.

• For data to be exported, the information includes


− the file name including path name and
− a status acknowledgement.
• For data to be imported, the information includes
− the file name and
− a status acknowledgement.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 6-233
File Management 08.00
6 6.4 "Directory" operating area (MMC 103) 6

6.4 "Directory" operating area (MMC 103)

6.4.1 Basic display

Function

The "Directory" basic screen displays all the directories/programs


stored in the data management directory of the hard disk, in the
NC main memory or accessible via network drives/floppy disk drive
(if installed) (see example below).

Example of a directory management screen on the MMC103

Explanation of the basic Display of the current file tree


display
The following file properties (depending on default setting) can be
displayed for each file:

Name Directory name/file name


Files with a name of maximum 24 characters in length can be
administered on the MMC.
If files are transferred to external systems (V.24, floppy disk), the
name is truncated to 8 characters. The full name is not however lost.
When files of this type are read back in, they must be renamed
afterwards.

Type Specifies the file type


• WPD for directories
• MPF for programs

Loaded To execute a program in the NC (via NC Start), it must be loaded in


the NC main memory beforehand.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


6-234 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 File Management
6 6.4 "Directory" operating area (MMC 103) 6
To prevent the main memory from becoming overloaded, however,
interrelated progr. and data can be loaded (from the hard disk to the
NC main memory) and unloaded (from NC main memory to hard disk)
explicitly. The current status of a file is identified by an "X": File loaded.

Size Size of file in bytes (the source MMC or NCK directory is listed here for
directories).

Date/time Date of creation or date of last modification with time.

Horizontal softkeys

NC Programs/files in the NC main memory and data management


directory on the hard disk.

Softkey 2 Softkey 5 Softkeys 2 and 5 display directories and files which are stored on
... • network drives (network card required!),
• the floppy disk drive and
• on the hard disk as an archive directory.

Example

Example of a directory overview with programs from a network drive


The softkeys in the above example ("Archive", "DISK A:" and L:) can
be configured via display machine data.
Please read the machine tool manufacturer’s instruction manual!

Vertical softkeys

Execute Program is selected when required and loaded to the NC main


memory. The system switches over to the "Machine Auto" operating
area simultaneously.
New Cut Files/directories can be set up, renamed, copied, deleted and moved.
...

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 6-235
File Management 08.00
6 6.4 "Directory" operating area (MMC 103) 6
Continue Press this softkey to switch to a new vertical softkey menu in which
>>
you can
• load or unload files,
• execute programs from the hard disk,
• program multiple clamping,
• back up tool and zero point data or
• read data out or in.

6.4.2 Create files/directories

Function

This subsection describes how new programs or a new directory can


be set up.

Operating sequence

Program "Directory" operating area is selected.


Manager
The current overview of directories stored in the NC is displayed.
Create programs

Position the cursor on a directory of your choice and open it. An


overview of the programs already existing in the directory is displayed.
If it contains no programs, an empty program overview appears.

New Once you have pressed the "New" softkey, you can
• create a ShopMill program (see Chapter "Programming with
ShopMill")
• or a G code program (see Chapter "Programming with G code").
Create a directory

Program "Directory" operating area is selected.


Manager
The current overview of directories stored in the NC is displayed.

New Directory The input window "New directory" is opened.

Enter a new directory name.

Confirm the directory name by pressing

or with

The new directory is created in the directory overview.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


6-236 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 File Management
6 6.4 "Directory" operating area (MMC 103) 6
No further subdirectories can be set up in the NC main memory.

6.4.3 Open files/directories

Operating sequence

Select and call a


file/directory
Program "Directory" operating area is selected.
Manager
The current overview of directories stored in the NC main memory and
the data management directory on the hard disk is displayed.
Position the cursor on the file/directory you want to open.

• The selected file is called in the Program Editor.


or • The selected directory branches into the next directory level
(subdirectory) or file level.

Return to the next higher directory level


The return line is displayed if there is a higher directory level in the
directory overview.

Position the cursor on the return line and press the "Input" key.

OR

position the cursor on any line and press the "Cursor left" key.

The higher directory level is displayed.

6.4.4 Load and unload programs

Function

Load Programs can be saved from the data management directory on the
hard disk to the NC main memory by the following methods:
• By executing the program with softkeys "Execute" and "Execute
from here" (see Section "Select a program for execution")
• By manually loading one or several programs.
When you manually load one single program, the
− ShopMill subroutines
− and all other subroutines starting with "CALL" are loaded at the
same time.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 6-237
File Management 08.00
6 6.4 "Directory" operating area (MMC 103) 6
If you select several programs in the program directory, then only the
selected programs are loaded and not the associated subroutines.

Unload Programs you have loaded are not automatically unloaded. With a
manual unload operation, you can save programs from the NC main
memory back to the data management directory on the hard disk. You
can relieve the load on the NC by removing any programs which are
no longer needed.

Operating sequence

Manual load/unload

Prog ram
Press the "Program Manager" key.
M anager

Position the cursor on the program you want to unload.

Continue Load The file you select is deleted from the data management directory on
>> manual
the hard disk and loaded to the NC main memory. The file is then
marked with an "X" (for loaded) in the "Loaded" column of the directory
overview.

Continue Unload The selected file is deleted from the NC main memory and loaded to
>> manual
the data management directory on the hard disk. No "X" appears in
the "Loaded" column of the directory overview.

Load (execute)

Execute Position the cursor on the program in the directory you want to
execute. When you select the "Execute" softkey, the selected program
is loaded to the NC main memory.

Machine You can use this softkey to load a program from the "Program"
from here
operating area to the NC main memory.

The program is executed when you press "NC Start".

When you select "Execute" or "Machine from here", the necessary


subroutines are automatically loaded if they are not already loaded.
Programs you have loaded are not automatically unloaded.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


6-238 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 File Management
6 6.4 "Directory" operating area (MMC 103) 6

6.4.5 Select several programs

Operating sequence

Position the cursor on the first file to be selected in the directory


overview.

Mark Using softkey "Mark", you can select and mark blocks of files with the
cursor.

Using the toggle key, you can select and mark several files
individually.

6.4.6 Copy/rename/insert files/directories

Function

You can copy


• a single file,
• more than one file or
• a complete directory.

Operating sequence

Position the cursor on the file/directory you wish to copy.


Copy The selected file/directory is copied.

Select the copy destination.

Insert The copied source file/source directory is inserted at the selected


destination.

Rename a file/directory

File/directory is selected.

Enter a new file/directory name in the "To:" field and confirm with the
Rename
"Input" key.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 6-239
File Management 08.00
6 6.4 "Directory" operating area (MMC 103) 6

6.4.7 Delete/move files/directories

Function

File You can delete one or several files at a time.

Directory You can delete one directory with all its contents.

Operating sequence

Position the cursor on the file/directory you wish to copy.


Delete

Cut The selected file/directory is deleted.

Move

Cut Insert The source file/source directory is pasted at the selected destination.

6.4.8 Execute from hard disk

Function

If a program needs more memory space for execution than is


available in the NC main memory, then you can load the program
contents continuously from the hard disk.

Operating sequence

Precondition You have selected the directory via the "Program Manager" key.

Select the program you want to execute with the cursor.

Continue Execute frm. The program contents are loaded continuously to the NC main
>> hard disk
memory while the program is being processed.

Press the "NC Start" key.

The program remains stored on the hard disk when it is loaded for
"Execute from hard disk".

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


6-240 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 File Management
6 6.4 "Directory" operating area (MMC 103) 6

6.4.9 Set up the V.24 interface

Function

You can send files to an external data backup device (e.g. PG/PC,
printer), or read them in (e.g. PG/PC) via the V.24 interface. You must
set the appropriate parameters for the V.24 interface and your data
backup device. The control offers you a suitable input screen form in
which you can define the specific data for your device.

Operating sequence

Precondition • You have selected the directory in the "Program Manager" and the
"NC" data area (NC main memory and data management directory
on the hard disk)
Continue • and pressed softkey "Continue".
>>

Read out Read in Select the mode of transmission for the V.24 interface.

V.24 Press softkey "V.24 settings" to display the "Parameterization V.24


settings
user" screen form. Assign the parameters in this screen form.

Position the cursor bar on the input fields and enter the necessary
values.

The values for parameters "Interface", "Protocol", "Baud rate",


or "Data bits", "Parity" and "Stop bits" can be selected with the toggle key
or "Alternat." softkey.

You can also activate or deactivate special functions with the


"toggle key" or the "Alternat." softkey.

Notes
Make sure that you set the correct file format (binary/PC, punched
tape or punched tape/ISO format).

This softkey closes the "Parameterization V.24 user" screen form.

The modified data are stored.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 6-241
File Management 08.00
6 6.4 "Directory" operating area (MMC 103) 6

6.4.10 Multiple clamping

Function

You can machine several workpieces at the same time by using the
"Multiple clamping" function. You can either execute the same
program several times or select several different machining programs.
The "Multiple clamping" function is an option.

The multiple clamping function creates one single program from


several different programs. This includes optimization of tool changes
in order to reduce machining times. The tool sequence within a
program remains unchanged. Cycles and subroutines are not opened,
position patterns are processed as closed units.

The individual programs must meet the following requirements:

• ShopMill programs only


• Program must have been tested
• Program for the 1st clamping must have been trial run
• No markers/repetitions, i.e. no branches in the program
• No inch/metric switchover
• No transformations
• Contours must have unique names, i.e. the same contour name
must not be called in several different programs
• Max. of 50 contours per clamping
• Max. (99 start ZO) number of clampings

You can substitute subroutines for the markers or repetitions which


may not be included in programs for multiple clampings.

Operating sequence

Program Program
Select the "Program Manager" key or softkey.
Manager or
Manager

Multiple Select softkey "Multiple clamping" in the extended softkey menu.


clamping
Enter the number of clampings and the number of the first zero offset
to be used. The clampings are processed in ascending sequence from
the start zero offset. The zero offsets are defined in the "Tools/Zero
Offsets" menu (see Section "Zero offsets").

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


6-242 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 File Management
6 6.4 "Directory" operating area (MMC 103) 6
Enter a name for the new, global program (XYZ.MPF) and confirm
with "OK". The program is stored in the directory that was previously
selected in the program manager.
A list is displayed in which the different programs must be assigned to
the zero offsets.

Program Go to the program overview by selecting softkey "Program selection".


selection
Select the appropriate directory and mark the relevant program. Press
softkey "OK".
Repeat this process until a program is assigned to every zero offset.

On all If you wish to execute the same program on all clampings, select
clampings
softkey "On all clampings" after you have selected the program.
You can assign different programs to individual zero offsets first, and
then assign one program to the remaining zero offsets by selecting
softkey "On all clampings".

Delete Delete all You can clear individual or all programs from the assignment list again
selection
by means of softkeys "Delete selection" and "Delete all".

Create When you have completed the assignment list, select softkey "Create
program
program". This optimizes the tool changes.
The global program is then renumbered. The number of the current
clamping is specified every time the program switches from one
clamping to another.

• Apart from the global program (XYZ.MPF), the file XYZ_MCD.INI


is also set up in which the assignment between zero offsets and
programs is stored.
• If you switch from the assignment list (without "Abort" or "Create
program") to another function and then call the "Multiple clamping"
function later on, the same assignment list is displayed again.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 6-243
File Management 08.00
6 6.4 "Directory" operating area (MMC 103) 6

6.4.11 Back up tool/zero point data

Function

You can use the "Back up data" function to save the tool offset and
zero point data which are associated with a program or stored in the
tool management system.

Operating sequence

Position the cursor on the relevant program in the directory.

Continue Back up Select softkey "Back up data" in the extended softkey menu.
>> data

Select whether and which tool offset data and zero offsets you wish to
save. With "All used in program", all the tools or zero offsets used in a
particular program will be backed up; "Complete tool list" or "All" will
back up all the data from the tool management system. You can also
read out the associated magazine assignments and basic zero offset
at the same time.

You cannot read out the magazine assignments with the "Tool
management without loading/unloading" option.

Change the default file name ("Name_TMZ") if necessary.


If a file with the selected program name already exists, you can
overwrite or rename the file.

When you select "OK", the data are stored in the same directory as
the selected program.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


6-244 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 File Management
6 6.4 "Directory" operating area (MMC 103) 6

6.4.12 Read in tool/zero point data

Function

You can use the "Read in data" function to read in the tool offset and
zero point data stored for a program.

Operating sequence

Position the cursor on the file containing the tool/zero point data
("Name_TMZ") in the directory.

Execute Select the "Execute" softkey, the "Input" key or the "Cursor right" key.

Select which data (tool offset data, magazine assignments, zero point
data, basic zero offset) you wish to read in.
Confirm your selection with "OK".

With respect to reading in data, please note the following:


• If all tool offset data need to be read in, the tool management is
deleted first and the backup data then read in.
• If all the tool data used in the program are read in and a particular
tool already exists in the tool management, then you can choose
between the following options:
Replace all All tool data used in the program are read in, i.e. existing tools are
overwritten without further warning.

Replace The data read-in operation is aborted.


none
The old tool is retained.

The old tool is overwritten.


With the tool management option without loading/unloading, the
old tool is deleted; in the case of the "with loading/unloading"
variant, the old tool is unloaded beforehand.
If you change the tool name with "Yes" before the data are
transferred, the tool is also entered in the tool list.

• Existing zero offsets are always overwritten when data are read in.
• If the magazine assignments are not read in with the other data,
the tools are entered without location number in the tool list.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 6-245
File Management 08.00
6 6.4 "Directory" operating area (MMC 103) 6

6.4.13 Read out files

Function

You can read out one or more files via the V.24 interface.

• When you select one single file, the ShopMill subroutines included
in the program are transferred at the same time.
• When you select more than one file, only the selected files are
transferred.

When reading out files to an external storage medium, please note the
output formats and device settings of the V.24 interface.

Operating sequence

Position the cursor on the file you wish to read out in the directory.

Continue Read out Select softkeys "Continue" and "Read out".


>>
Start the data storage device.

Start
Press softkey "Start".

The selected file and all its ShopMill subroutines are read out.

The "Readout" window displays the name of the file and the number of
transferred bytes.

Stop
You can abort the data output by pressing softkey "Stop".

All You can select all files stored in the directory by pressing softkey
files
"All files".

6.4.14 Read in files

Operating sequence

Precondition The interface for your data storage device is correctly selected.

Continue Read in Select softkeys "Continue" and "Read in".


>>

Start
When you press softkey "Start", the data are read in and stored in the
specified path.
The system automatically detects whether the file to be read in is in
binary/PC, punched tape or punched tape/ISO format.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


6-246 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 File Management
6 6.4 "Directory" operating area (MMC 103) 6
The names of the imported files and the number of transferred bytes
are displayed on the screen.

Start the data storage device.

Stop
You can abort the data import by pressing softkey "Stop".

Start
To restart the data import process, press softkey "Start" again. You
must also start the data storage device again at the same time.

6.4.15 Error log

Function

Select the error log

Error log By pressing softkey "Error log", you can display information about the
data transfer operation.

• For data to be exported, the information includes


− the file name including path name and
− a status acknowledgement.
• For data to be imported, the information includes
− the file name and
− a status acknowledgement.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 6-247
File Management 08.00
6 6.4 "Directory" operating area (MMC 103) 6

Notes

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


6-248 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Alarms and Messages
7 7
Alarms and Messages

7.1 Cycle alarms and messages................................................................................... 7-250


7.1.1 Error treatment in cycles ......................................................................................... 7-250
7.1.2 Cycle alarm overview.............................................................................................. 7-250
7.1.3 Messages in cycles................................................................................................. 7-254

7.2 Alarms for ShopMill................................................................................................. 7-255


7.2.1 Alarm overview ....................................................................................................... 7-255
7.2.2 Select the alarm/message overview ....................................................................... 7-256
7.2.3 Description of alarms .............................................................................................. 7-257

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 7-249
Alarms and Messages 08.00
7 7.1 Cycle alarms and messages 7

7.1 Cycle alarms and messages

7.1.1 Error treatment in cycles

If the system detects an error status while processing a cycle, it


generates an alarm and aborts cycle execution.
Alarms with numbers ranging from 61000 to 62999 are generated in
cycles.
The reset criteria for these number ranges are
• NC-RESET for 61000 ... 61999 and
• CANCEL for 62000 ... 62999
The error text that is simultaneously displayed with the alarm number
indicates the possible error cause.

7.1.2 Cycle alarm overview

The following table provides an overview of cycles that might be generated in


machining cycles and tips for remedying the underlying errors.

Alarm number Alarm text Explanation, remedy


61000 "No tool offset active" D offset must be programmed before cycle is
called
61001 "Thread pitch incorrectly defined" Check parameters for thread size and pitch
settings (for contradiction)
61002 "Machining type incorrectly The machining type parameter has been set to
defined" the wrong value and needs to be altered.
61003 "No feedrate programmed in cycle" The feedrate parameter has been set to the
wrong value and needs to be altered.
61006 "Tool radius too large"
61007 "Tool radius too small"
61009 "Active tool number = 0" Load the required tool
61010 "Finishing allowance too large" Reduce the finishing allowance setting
61011 "Invalid scaling" The active scaling factor is not permissible for
this cycle.
61012 "Different scales in one plane"
61013 "Basic settings have been altered, Check basic settings and alter them if
program cannot be executed" necessary
61101 "Reference plane incorrectly If you choose to program relative depth
defined" settings, you must select different values for the
reference and return planes. Alternatively, set
an absolute depth value

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


7-250 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Alarms and Messages
7 7.1 Cycle alarms and messages 7
61102 "No spindle direction programmed" A spindle direction must be programmed
61103 "Number of holes is zero" You have not programmed a value for the
number of holes
61104 "Contour violation of slots" Errors in parameterization of milling pattern in
those parameters which define the position of
slots on a circle and their shape
61105 "Cutter radius too large" The diameter of the selected cutting tool is too
large for the profile to be machined. You must
either use a tool with a smaller radius or modify
the contour
61106 "Number or spacing of circle Parameterization error, programmed circle
elements" elements cannot be arranged around a full
circle
61107 "First drilling depth incorrectly First drilling depth is inverted in relation to total
defined" drilling depth
61108 "No valid settings for parameters Parameters "Radius" and "Infeed depth per
_RAD1 and _DP1" revolution" must be taken into account for
insertion along helical path
61109 "Parameter _CDIR incorrectly Parameter defining milling direction is
defined" incorrectly defined
61110 "Finishing allowance on base > Alter setting for depth infeed if necessary
infeed depth"
61111 "Infeed width > tool diameter" The programmed infeed width is greater than
the diameter of the active tool. The infeed width
must be reduced.
61112 "Tool radius negative" The radius of the active tool is negative. This is
illegal.
61113 "Parameter _CRAD for corner Reduce the parameter for corner radius
radius too large"
61114 "Direction of machining G41/G42 Check the machining direction of tool radius
incorrectly defined" compensation left/right and alter
61115 "Approach or retract mode The contour approach and retract mode has
(line/circle/plane/ been incorrectly defined. Check parameters
space) incorrectly defined" "Approach/retract mode" and "Approach/retract
strategy".
61116 "Approach or retract path = 0" The approach or retract path is set to zero, it
must be increased.
61117 "Active tool radius <= 0" The radius of the active tool is negative or set to
zero. This is illegal.
61118 "Length or width = 0" The length or width of the milling surface is not
legal.
61119 "Nominal or core diameter
incorrectly programmed"
61120 "Thread type internal, external not You must enter the internal, external thread
defined" type

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 7-251
Alarms and Messages 08.00
7 7.1 Cycle alarms and messages 7
61121 "Number of teeth/cutting edge Enter the number of teeth/cutting edge for the
missing" active tool in the tool list
61122 "Safety clearance in the plane The safety clearance is negative or zero. This is
incorrectly defined" illegal.
61124 "Infeed width is not programmed" In active simulation without a tool, a value for
the infeed width must always be programmed.
61200 "Too many elements in machining Edit machining block, delete elements if
block" necessary
61201 "Incorrect sequence in machining Sort the machining block sequence
block"
61202 "Not a technology cycle"
61203 "Not a position cycle"
61204 "Unknown technology cycle"
61205 "Unknown position cycle"
61210 "Block search element not found"
61211 "Absolute reference missing"
61212 "Incorrect tool type" Select a new tool type
61213 "Circle radius too small" Enter a larger value for the circle radius
61214 "No pitch programmed" The pitch must be programmed
61215 "Blank dimension incorrectly
programmed"
61216 "Feed/tooth possible only for Alternatively, you can set another feed type
milling tools"
61217 "Cutting rate programmed for tool Enter a cutting rate setting
radius 0 "
61218 "Feed/tooth programmed, but Enter the number of teeth of the cutting tool in
number of teeth is zero" the "Tool list" menu
61222 "Plane infeed greater than tool
diameter "
61223 "Approach path too small" Enter a larger value for the approach path
61224 "Retract path too small" Enter a larger value for the retract path
61225 "Swiveling data block unknown" An attempt has been made to access an
undefined swiveling data block.
61226 "Swivel head cannot be replaced" The parameter "Swivel data block change" is
set to "no". An attempt has still been made to
change the swivel head.
61230 "Tool probe diameter too small" The tool probe is not correctly calibrated.
61231 "ShopMill program cannot be The program must be simulated in ShopMill first
executed; not yet tested by or transferred to the "Machine Auto" area.
ShopMill"
61232 "Magazine tool cannot be loaded" An attempt has been made to automatically
load a tool into a swivel head which can hold
only manual tools.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


7-252 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Alarms and Messages
7 7.1 Cycle alarms and messages 7
61234 "ShopMill subroutine cannot be The subroutine must be simulated in ShopMill
executed; not yet tested by first or transferred to the "Machine Auto" area.
ShopMill"
61301 "Probe is not responding" • Check probe connections
• Set a longer measuring distance via MD
9752, 9753, 9754, 9755
• For edge measurements: Position probe
closer to edge
• Position approximately over center of
spigots/holes
• Check setting for spigot/hole diameter
61302 "Probe collision" The probe has collided with an obstacle on its
positioning path.
• Check spigot diameter (it may be too small)
• Check measuring path (it may be too long)
61303 "Safe area exceeded" Result of spigot/hole diameter measurement
deviates significantly from specified value.
Check radius or diameter.
Check measuring location (e.g. for inaccuracies
caused by swarf)
61308 Check measuring path 2a Enter measuring path = 0
Check MD 9752, 9753, 9754, 9755
61309 Check probe type Probe type: 3D probe not active
61310 Scaling factor is active Scaling factor = scaling is active
61311 No D number is active No tool offset has been selected for the probe
(for workpiece measurements) or for the active
tool (for tool measurements).
61316 Center point and radius cannot be The system cannot calculate a circle from the
calculated measured points.
61332 Alter the tool tip position Tool tip is positioned below the probe surface
(e.g. with a setting ring gauge or cube)
61338 Positioning speed is zero Set corresponding feedrate (plane/infeed rate)
via MD 9757 or 9758
61605 "Contour incorrectly programmed"
61610 "No infeed depth programmed" The infeed depth must be programmed
62100 "No drilling cycle active" No modal drilling cycle has been called before
the drilling pattern cycle
62101 "Milling direction not correct - G3 Climb or conventional milling programmed, but
will be generated" the spindle was not rotating when the cycle was
called.
62103 "No finishing allowance
programmed"

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 7-253
Alarms and Messages 08.00
7 7.1 Cycle alarms and messages 7
7.1.3 Messages in cycles

Cycles display messages in the dialog line of the control system.


Messages of this type do not interrupt the machining process.
Messages describe certain operational characteristics of the relevant
cycle and indicate the current processing status. They are generally
displayed for one processing section or until the cycle end.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


7-254 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Alarms and Messages
7 7.2 Alarms for ShopMill 7

7.2 Alarms for ShopMill

7.2.1 Alarm overview

If errors are detected in ShopMill, the system generates an alarm and


aborts program execution if necessary.
The error text that is simultaneously displayed with the alarm number
indicates the possible error cause.

Overview of alarms 100000-100999 Basic system MMC


101000-101999 Diagnostics
102000-102999 Services
103000-103999 Machine
104000-104999 Parameters
105000-105999 Programming
106000-106999 Spare
107000-107999 OEM
110000-110999 Reserved
111000-112999 ShopMill
120000-120999 Reserved

Danger

Please check the plant situation as indicated in the description of the


alarm/s that has/have been generated. Eliminate the cause of the
alarm/s and acknowledge it/them as instructed. If you fail to observe
this alarm response procedure, you will endanger the machine,
workpiece, stored settings and possibly your own safety.

If you are working in CNC mode, please refer to alarm descriptions in


the following document:
/DA/, Diagnostics Guide

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 7-255
Alarms and Messages 08.00
7 7.2 Alarms for ShopMill 7

7.2.2 Select the alarm/message overview

Function

You can view alarms and messages and then acknowledge them.

Operating sequence

Alarms The alarm/message overview displays all active alarms and messages
Alarm
Messages or with numbers, date, cancel criterion and explanation.
Cancel the alarm with the key displayed in symbol form:

Switch machine/control off and on again (main switch)


or NCK POWER ON
Press the "Reset key"

Press the "Acknowledge alarm" key

The alarm is cancelled by an "NC Start"

The alarm is cancelled by the "Recall" key

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


7-256 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Alarms and Messages
7 7.2 Alarms for ShopMill 7

7.2.3 Description of alarms

111 311 NC Start is not possible: Deselect SBL mode


Explanation You have activated a program with block search even though SBL
mode was active at the same time.
Reaction NC-Start disable
Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Deselect SBL mode

112 045 More insertion points required


Explanation The system requires more insertion points to machine the contour
pocket.
The machining process is divided into several individual operations.
Residual material will be left on the workpiece.
Reaction Alarm display
This alarm is a warning only.
The program can be started.
Remedy If you use a smaller cutter, you may be able to perform the operation
with a single insertion point.

112 046 Main contour cannot be traversed


Explanation The pocket contour cannot be traversed with the programmed cutting
tool.
Residual material will be left on the workpiece.
Reaction Alarm display
This alarm is a warning only.
The program can be started.
Remedy You may be able to traverse the whole pocket contour if you use a
smaller cutter.

112 052 No residual material generated


Explanation No residual material has been generated.
You may not need to remove any residual material.
Reaction Alarm display
This alarm is a warning only.
The program can be started.
Remedy No remedial action necessary.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 7-257
Alarms and Messages 08.00
7 7.2 Alarms for ShopMill 7
112 057 Programmed helix violates contour
Explanation You have selected the starting point for helical insertion such that the
programmed contour is violated by the helix.
Reaction Alarm display
This alarm is a warning only.
The program can be started.
Remedy Select another starting point.
Use a smaller helix radius.

112 099 System error contour pocket


Explanation An error has occurred during calculation of the contour pocket.
Reaction Alarm display
The system cannot calculate the contour pocket.
The program cannot be started.
Remedy Please note the error text and contact the Siemens A&D MC Hotline.

112 100 Renumbering error.


Initial state restored.
Explanation You have selected softkey "Renumber" in the program editor. An error
has occurred during renumbering which has damaged the program in
the memory. The original program must now be reloaded to the
memory.
Reaction Alarm display
Program has not been renumbered.
Remedy Create space in the memory, e.g. by deleting an old program.
Select "Renumber" softkey again.

112 200 Contour is Step in current program sequence. Processing not


enabled
Explanation The selected contour is an element of the program loaded under
"Program".
Reaction Alarm display
The contour is an element from a loaded program and cannot be
deleted or renamed.
Remedy Remove contour from the loaded program.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


7-258 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Alarms and Messages
7 7.2 Alarms for ShopMill 7
112 201 Contour is step in current Automatic sequence. Processing not
enabled
Explanation The selected contour is an element of the program loaded under
"Machine Auto".
Reaction Alarm display
The contour is an element of a program loaded under "Machine
Automatic" and cannot be deleted or renamed. After program start,
contours included in the current program cannot be altered under
"Program" while the program is running.
Remedy Stop program run and load program under "Program". Delete contour
from program.

112 210 Tool axis cannot be reselected. Insufficient NC memory.


Explanation If you select another tool axis, you must generate a new NC program.
You must save the old NC program first and then generate the new
one. There is not sufficient NC memory available at this point to store
the new program.
Reaction Alarm display
The new tool axis is not selected.
Remedy You must create free space in the NC memory corresponding to at
least the space required by the new program (e.g. by deleting
programs you no longer need).

112 211 System unable to process tool preselection. Insufficient NC


memory.
Explanation Before a tool preselection can be processed, you must generate a
new NC program. You must save the old NC program first and then
generate the new one. There is not sufficient NC memory available at
this point to store the new program.
Reaction Alarm display
The system does not process the tool preselection.
Remedy You must create free space in the NC memory corresponding to at
least the space required by the new program (e.g. by deleting
programs you no longer need).

112 300 Tool management strategy 2 impossible.


Magazine is not fully loaded
Explanation The magazine is not fully loaded with tools. The number of tools
defined in machine data MM_NUM_TOOL must be set up in the
magazine for tool management strategy 2.
Reaction POWER-ON alarm
Remedy Start-up: Set up the correct number of tools

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 7-259
Alarms and Messages 08.00
7 7.2 Alarms for ShopMill 7
112 301 Tool management strategy 2 impossible.
Magazine is not sorted according to tool list
Explanation The magazine list is not sorted in the same way as the tool list.
The tool order in the magazine for tool management strategy 2 must
be defined according to their T numbers.
Reaction POWER-ON alarm
Remedy Start-up: Define tools according to their T numbers in magazine
locations

112 323 Remove inclinable head


Explanation You are requested to remove the specified inclinable head from the
spindle.
Reaction Alarm display
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!
Remedy Remove inclinable head.
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!

112 324 Attach inclinable head


Explanation You are requested to mount the specified inclinable head in the
spindle.
Reaction Alarm display
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!
Remedy Mount inclinable head.
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!

112 325 Replace inclinable head


Explanation You are requested to replace the specified inclinable head in the
spindle with a new inclinable head.
Reaction Alarm display
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!
Remedy Replace inclinable head
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!

112 326 Set inclinable head


Explanation You are requested to set the inclinable head according to the specified
data.
Reaction Alarm display
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!
Remedy Set inclinable head.
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


7-260 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Alarms and Messages
7 7.2 Alarms for ShopMill 7
112 327 Angle outside the permissible range
Explanation The programmed machining operation cannot be performed with the
inclinable head.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Press NC Start.
Clamp the workpiece differently if appropriate.

112 328 Angle adjusted to angular grid


Explanation Owing to the angular grid, the inclinable head cannot be set to exactly
the specified angle.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy The machining operation can continue with the set values, but will not
match the programmed machining values exactly.

112 329 Set swivel head/table


Explanation You are requested to set the swivel head/table according to the
specified data.
Reaction Alarm display
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!
Remedy Set swivel head/table
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!

112 330 Set swivel table


Explanation You are requested to set the swivel table according to the specified
data.
Reaction Alarm display
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!
Remedy Set swivel table
Please read the machine manufacturer’s instruction manual!

112 350 No swiveling data available


Explanation No swiveling data sets are available.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Set up the necessary swiveling data sets
(see /FBSP/, ShopMill Description of Functions)

112 400 Not available in the tool management


Explanation The tool stipulated in the program does not exist.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy You must create the tool before saving the data.

112 401 Tool setup has failed


Explanation The system was unable to set up a tool as the tool data were being
read in.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Check tool management.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 7-261
Alarms and Messages 08.00
7 7.2 Alarms for ShopMill 7
112 420 Error in inch/metric system switchover! Check all data!
Explanation Not all data have been converted for the inch/metric switchover.
Reaction Alarm display
NC-Start disable
Remedy Check the following data:
• Display machine data:
MD9655: $MM_CMM_CYC_PECKING_DIST
MD9656: $MM_CMM_CYC_DRILL_RELEASE_DIST
MD9658: $MM_CMM_CYC_MIN_COUNT_PO_TO_RAD
MD9664: $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_MIN
MD9665: $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_ROT
MD9666: $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_TOOTH
MD9670: $MM_CMM_START_RAD_CONTOUR_POCKET
MD9752: $MM_CMM_MEASURING_DISTANCE
MD9753: $MM_CMM_MEAS_DIST_MAN
MD9754: $MM_CMM_MEAS_DIST_TOOL_LENGTH
MD9755: $MM_CMM_MEAS_DIST_TOOL_RADIUS
MD9756: $MM_CMM_MEASURING_FEED
MD9757: $MM_CMM_FEED_WITH_COLL_CTRL
MD9758: $MM_CMM_POS_FEED_WITH_COLL_CTRL
MD9759: $MM_CMM_MAX_CIRC_SPEED_ROT_SP
MD9761: $MM_CMM_MIN_FEED_ROT_SP
MD9762: $MM_CMM_MEAS_TOL_ROT_SP
MD9765: $MM_CMM_T_PROBE_DIAM_LENGTH_MEAS
MD9766: $MM_CMM_T_PROBE_DIAM_RAD_MEAS
MD9767: $MM_CMM_T_PROBE_DIST_RAD_MEAS
MD10240: $MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC
MD20150 [12]: $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES
• Tool data for tool edges D1 and D2:
Length Z, radius R,
wear lengths Z and R
• Zero offsets:
Basic offset
Position in X, Y, Z and A, C (if configured)
Settable zero offset
• Settings in the MANUAL operating area:
Return plane
Safety clearance
Note This alarm can occur only in connection with hardware defects.

112 502 Insufficient memory


Abort in line %1
Explanation %1 = line number
Program contains too many program blocks
Reaction Alarm display
Program is not loaded
Remedy Modify program in PROGRAMS operating area of SINUMERIK 840D
or 810D (CNC mode).

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


7-262 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Alarms and Messages
7 7.2 Alarms for ShopMill 7
112 504 File does not exist or is faulty: %1
Explanation %1 = Name of file/contour
Program cannot interpret a program block containing contour
programming. Contour does not exist in directory.
Reaction Alarm display
NC-Start disable
Remedy Load contour to directory.

112 505 Error in interpreting contour %1


Explanation %1 = Name of contour
Contour is faulty
Reaction Alarm display
NC-Start disable
Remedy Check contour machining sequence

112 506 Maximum number of contour elements exceeded %1


Explanation %1 = Name of contour
The maximum permissible number of contour elements (50) has been
exceeded during interpretation of the contour machining sequence.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Check contour machining sequence, revise if necessary.

112 541 Program cannot be interpreted


Explanation The program cannot be interpreted as a ShopMill program during
loading as the program header is missing.
Reaction Alarm display
NC-Start disable
Remedy -

112 604 Link to PLC interrupted


Explanation Checkback message to the PLC user program that the link to the
ShopMill MMC is interrupted.
Reaction Alarm display
ShopMill PLC is shut down
Remedy Check the PLC user program.

112 605 Asynchronous subroutine has not been executed


Note The NC has not been able to process the input values correctly.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Press NC Start.

112 650 Unknown PLC error


Explanation The PLC has signaled an error which cannot be recognized by the
operator interface.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 7-263
Alarms and Messages 08.00
7 7.2 Alarms for ShopMill 7
Reaction Alarm display
NC-Start disable
Remedy Press POWER ON, contact Siemens.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


7-264 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Examples
8 8
Examples

8.1 Example 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot ........................... 8-266

8.2 Example 2: Shift and mirror a contour .................................................................... 8-274

8.3 Example 3: Chamfer on circular spigot................................................................... 8-277

8.4 Example 4: Cylinder surface transformation........................................................... 8-280

8.5 Example 5: Slot side compensation........................................................................ 8-283

8.6 Example 6: Swiveling.............................................................................................. 8-287

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 8-265
Examples 08.00
8 8.1 Ex. 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot 8
8.1 Ex. 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot

Workpiece drawing

0
-4
-6

20
-10
4

0 85

R1
155 0 10
5

R1
R1 16

0
30
135
R25

R
40
o
115 20
R20

180
10
Depth -3
30 o
95

70

0
R1
R28
35
40

R5
o
60 15
20
15

25
15
15 Start point
+Y
0
0
+X
0
15 25 90 155 165
180

Program part_4

1. Program header • Define a blank:


X0 0 abs Y0 0 abs Z0 0 abs
X1 180abs Y1 180abs Z1-20abs

• Select softkey

2. Face milling Milling Face


• Select via softkeys milling > and choose a machining
strategy
• Example of technological data:
T FACING TOOL F 0.1 mm/tooth V 1200 m/min
Machining Roughing
X0 0 abs
Y0 0 abs
Z0 1 abs
X1 180 abs
Y1 180 abs

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


8-266 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Examples
8 8.1 Ex. 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot 8
Z1 0 abs
DXY 80 %
DZ 0.5
UZ 0

• Select softkey

3. Outside contour of The outside contour can be defined as a rectangular spigot as shown
workpiece here. It is of course also possible to use the contour milling function.

Milling Spigot Rectangular


• Select via softkeys > spigot

• Assign technological parameters T, F and S accordingly and enter


the following parameters:

Position of Bottom left


reference point
Position type Single position
X0 0 abs
Y0 0 abs
Z0 0 abs
W 180 abs
L 180 abs
R 10 abs
α0 0 degrees
Z1 20 inc
DZ 20
UXY 0
UZ 0
W1 185 (fictitious blank dimension)
L1 185 (fictitious blank dimension)

4. Outside contour of island In order to machine the entire surface outside the island, define a
contour pocket around the blank and then program the island. This
ensures that the entire surface area is machined and no residual
material is left behind.

a) Outside contour of pocket Contour New


• Select via softkeys milling contour >

• Enter a contour name (in this case: Part_4_Pocket) and confirm

• Fill in start screenform for contour


Tool axis Z
X0 –20 abs Y0 0 abs

and confirm .

• Enter the following contour elements and confirm each with softkey

1. X 200 abs

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 8-267
Examples 08.00
8 8.1 Ex. 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot 8

2. Y 200 abs

3. X -20 abs
Close
4. contour

• Select softkey
a) Outside contour of island Contour New
• Select via softkeys milling contour >

• Enter a contour name (in this case: Part_4_Island) and confirm

• Fill in start screenform for contour


Tool axis Z
X0 90 abs Y0 25 abs

and confirm .

• Enter the following contour elements and confirm each with softkey

1. X 25 abs FS 15

2. Y 115 abs R 20

3. X 15 abs Y 135 abs

4. Y 155 abs R 10

5. X 60 abs R 15

6. Y 135 abs R 20
Tangent
7. to prec. Direction of rotation
R 25abs X 110abs Y 135abs
Dialog Accept
selection dialog

Tangent
8. to prec.

Y 155abs R 15

9. R 0 abs

10. X 165 abs Y 95 abs α1 290 degrees R 0

11. X 155 abs α1 240 degrees R 28

12. FS 0

13. X 140 abs Y 25 abs α1 225 degrees R 0


Close
14. contour

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


8-268 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Examples
8 8.1 Ex. 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot 8

c) Mill/solid machine a contour Contour Remove


• Select via softkeys milling >

• Assign technological parameters T, F and S accordingly (e.g. cutter


diameter 10) and enter the following parameters:

Z0 0 abs
Z1 10 inc
DXY 4.5 mm
DZ 10
UXY 0 mm
UZ 0
Starting point auto
Insertion Center
FZ 0.1 mm/tooth
Select lift-off mode, e.g. to retraction plane


Notes:
• When selecting the milling tool, please make sure that the tool
diameter is large enough to cut the intended pocket. A message
will be output if you make a mistake.
• If you want to finish cut the pocket, you must assign parameters
UXY and UZ accordingly and add a second solid machining cycle
for finishing.

5. Mill a rectangular pocket Milling Pocket Rectangular

(large) • Select via softkeys > pocket

• Example of technological data:


T MILLTOOL10 F 0.1mm/tooth V 200m/min
Position of Center
reference point
Position type Single position
X0 90 abs
Y0 60 abs
Z0 0 abs
W 40
L 70
R 10
α0 15
Z1 4 inc
DXY 4.5 mm
DZ 4
UXY 0
UZ 0
Insertion Helical
EP 2
ER 2

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 8-269
Examples 08.00
8 8.1 Ex. 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot 8
Stock removal Complete machining


6. Mill a rectangular pocket Milling Pocket Rectangular

(small) • Select via softkeys > pocket

• Enter parameters:

X0 90 abs
Y0 60 abs
Z0 -4 abs
W 20
L 35
R 5
α0 15
Z1 4 inc
DXY 4.5 mm
DZ 2
UXY 0
UZ 0
Insertion Oscillation
EW 10 degrees
Stock removal Complete machining


7. Mill a circumferential slot Millling Groove Circumf.
• Select via softkeys > groove

• Example of technological data:


T MILLTOOL8 F 0.5mm/tooth FZ 0.02mm/tooth
V 150m/min

Full/pitch circle Pitch circle


X0 85 abs
Y0 135 abs
Z0 0 abs
W 10
R 40
α0 180 degrees
α1 180 degrees
α2 0 degrees
N 1
Z1 3 inc
DZ 3
UXY 0 mm


8. Drill/Center Drilling Center-
• Select via softkeys ing >

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


8-270 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Examples
8 8.1 Ex. 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot 8
• Assign technological parameters T, F and S accordingly and enter
the following parameters:

Diameter/tip Diameter
∅ 16


9. Drilling/reaming Drilling Drilling Drilling
• Select via softkeys Reaming >

• Assign technological parameters T, F and S accordingly (e.g.


DRILL10) and enter the following parameters:

Diameter/tip Tip
Z1 -25 abs
DT 0


10. Positions Drilling Positions
• Select via softkeys >

• Enter parameters:

rectangular
Z0 -10 abs
X0 15 abs
Y0 15 abs
X1 165 abs
Y1 15 abs


11. Obstacle Drilling Positions Obstacle
• Select via softkeys >

• Enter parameters:

Z 2 abs


Note:
If this obstacle cycle is not inserted, the drill will violate the right-hand
corner of the island contour. Alternatively, you could increase the
safety clearance.

12. Positions Drilling Positions


• Select via softkeys >

• Enter parameters:

rectangular
Z0 -10 abs
X2 165 abs
Y2 165 abs
X3 15 abs

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 8-271
Examples 08.00
8 8.1 Ex. 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot 8
Y3 165 abs


13. Mill a circular pocket Milling Pocket Circular
• Select via softkeys > pocket

• Example of technological data:


T MILLTOOL8 F 0.15mm/tooth V 300m/min

• Enter parameters:

Position type Single position


X0 85 abs
Y0 135 abs
Z0 –6 abs
Diameter 30
Z1 15 inc
DXY 4
DZ 5
UXY 0 mm
UZ 0
Insertion Center
FZ 0.1 mm/tooth
Stock removal Complete machining

Result • Programming graphic

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


8-272 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Examples
8 8.1 Ex. 1: Machine with rectang./circ. pocket and circumf. slot 8
• ShopMill program representation

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 8-273
Examples 08.00
8 8.2 Example 2: Shift and mirror a contour 8

8.2 Example 2: Shift and mirror a contour

Workshop drawing
Y+ Y+

60
40

R3
Z+
10

10 50 X+ 10
30
120

In this example, the displayed shapes occur several times in the same
program. Mirroring is to be carried out in addition to the shifting
operation. The shapes are to be machined with a stock removal cycle.

Program Part_1

1. Program header • Define a blank:


Corner point: X0 0 abs Y0 0 abs Z0 2 abs
Dimensions: L 120 W 60 H –30

• Select softkey

2. Set start marking for Misc. Set

repetition of the contour • Select via softkeys marker >

• Set start marking with "Marker1"


3. Define the contour Contour New
• Select via softkeys milling contour >

• Enter a contour name (in this case: PART_1_3COR) and confirm

• Fill in start screenform for contour


Tool axis Z
X0 10 abs Y0 10 abs

and confirm .

• Enter the following contour elements and confirm each with softkey

1. X 60 abs R 3

2. X 10 abs Y 40 abs R 3

3. X 10 abs Y 10 abs R 3

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


8-274 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Examples
8 8.2 Example 2: Shift and mirror a contour 8

• Select softkey
4. Solid machining Contour Stock
• Select via softkeys milling removal >

• Assign technological parameters T, F and S accordingly (e.g. cutter


diameter 3) and enter the following parameters:
Z0 0 abs
Z1 10 inc
DXY 1.5 mm
DZ 2
UXY 0.5
UZ 0.5
Starting point auto
Insertion Center
FZ 0.1 mm/tooth
Select lift-off mode, e.g. to retraction plane


5. Set end marker for contour Misc. Set
repetition • Select via softkeys marker >

• Set end marking with "Marker2"


6. Offset Misc. Transfor- Offset
• Select via softkeys mations > >

• Set the following parameters:

New/additive New
X 120
Y 60
Z 0


7. Mirroring Misc. Transfor- Mirror-
• Select via softkeys mations > ing >

• Set the following parameters:


New/additive add
X On
Y On
Z Off

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 8-275
Examples 08.00
8 8.2 Example 2: Shift and mirror a contour 8
8. Repetition of contour Misc. Repetition
• Select via softkeys >

• Set the following markers:

Start marker Marker 1


End marker Marker 2
Number of 1
repetitions


Result • Programming graphic

• ShopMill program representation

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


8-276 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Examples
8 8.3 Example 3: Chamfer on circular spigot 8

8.3 Example 3: Chamfer on circular spigot

Workshop drawing
Tool,
e.g. centering tool

2x45o

90o

25
50
Z-

Y+ 100

100
80

X+

In this example, a circular spigot with chamfer (2mmx45°) is machined


on a blank with a pre-machined circular spigot using a centering tool.

The general tool requirements for machining a chamfer are as follows:

• Tool diameter = 0 (e.g. centering tool)


• Tool cutting edge angle = 90°

Determining UXY and Z1:

Z1 (inc) = UXY + chamfer

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 8-277
Examples 08.00
8 8.3 Example 3: Chamfer on circular spigot 8

Tool,
e.g. centering
tool

Plane Z0=0
of the spigot 2x45o 90o 3mm = Z1

2mm chamfer

UXY=1mm allowance
for

Program Part_3

1. Program header • Define a blank:


X0 0 abs Y0 0 abs Z0 0 abs
X1 100abs Y1 100abs Z1 –50abs

• Select softkey

2. Circular spigot Milling Spigot Circular


• Select via softkeys > spigot

• Example of technological data:


TMILLTOOL40 F2000mm/min V200m/min

• Set the following parameters:

Machining type Roughing


Position type Single position
X0 50 abs
Y0 50 abs
Z0 0 abs
∅ 80
Z1 25 inc
DZ 5
UXY 0 mm
UZ 0.5
∅1 100

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


8-278 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Examples
8 8.3 Example 3: Chamfer on circular spigot 8
3. Circular spigot Milling Spigot Circular
• Select via softkeys > spigot

• Example of technological data:


T CENTERER F 2000mm/min S 200rev/min

• Set the following parameters:

Machining type Finishing


Position type Single position
X0 50 abs
Y0 50 abs
Z0 0 abs
∅ 80
Z1 3 inc
DZ 10
UXY 1 mm
UZ 0
∅1 100


Result • Programming graphic

• ShopMill program representation

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 8-279
Examples 08.00
8 8.4 Example 4: Cylinder surface transformation 8

8.4 Example 4: Cylinder surface transformation

360o

90° Z

90o

Y
30°
o80mm
10°

30 o
Y
10 o
X 0o
-100 -60 -45 0

Preconditions • There is a rotary axis, e.g. axis A, and the transformation is


configured via machine data.
• The reference points on the cylinder are predefined.
Program the reference points X0, Y0, Z0 and the required zero
offset, for example, in "Machine Manual", "Workpiece zero" and
"Edge". The zero offset calculated from these is entered in the zero
offset list.

Program

1. Program header • The blank dimensions correspond to the developed cylinder


peripheral surface (L= ∅ x π).
Define a blank:
X0 0abs Y0 0abs Z0 40abs
X1 –100abs Y1 251.327abs Z1 20abs RP 50
Note: Y1 is calculated from diameter 80 multiplied by π (3,14...)

• Select softkey

2. Activate the zero offset in Select zero offset for cylinder surface transformation (e.g. offset the
the program zero point on the center point of the cylinder end face).
Misc. Trans- Move zero
• Select via softkeys formations> point >

• Select the required zero offset and then select softkey .

3. Position the Y axis Position the tool in the Y axis over the center of the cylinder since the
Y axis is not traversed after cylinder transformation is selected.
Straight l. Straight
• Select via softkeys Circle line

• Enter parameters:
X 10 abs Y 0 abs Z 50 abs A 0 abs
F *rapid traverse* mm/min radius compensation Off

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


8-280 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Examples
8 8.4 Example 4: Cylinder surface transformation 8
4. Activate cylinder peripheral Misc. Transfor- Cylinder
surface transformation • Select via softkeys mations > surface >

• Enter parameters:
Transformation On
∅ 80
Slot side comp. OFF

5. Activate the zero offset in Define the zero offset for the machining operation on the developed
the program cylinder surface.
Misc. Transfor- Move zero
• Select via softkeys mations > point >

• Select the required zero offset and then select softkey .


6. Enter contour with contour Contour New
calculator • Select via softkeys milling contour >

• Enter contour name and confirm

• Fill in the contour start screen form


Tool axis Z
Cylinder surface yes
∅ 80
X 0 Yα 10abs
Note: Delete Y value, then enter Yα value (in this case, 10°).

• Enter the following contour elements and confirm each with softkey

1. X –60abs

2. Yα 90abs

3. X –45abs

4. Yα 30abs

5. X 0abs

7. Path milling Contour Path


• Select via softkeys milling milling

• Enter parameters
T CUTTER8 F 0.2mm/tooth S 5000U/min

Radius compensation Machining


Z0 40abs Z1 10inc DZ 10
UZ0
UXY 0
Approach Linear
Depth infeed
L1 2
FZ 0,1 mm/tooth
Retract Linear

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 8-281
Examples 08.00
8 8.4 Example 4: Cylinder surface transformation 8
Retract strategy
L2 2
Liftoff mode to return plane

8. Deactivate cylinder Misc. Transfor- Cylinder


peripheral surface • Select via softkeys mations > surface >

transformation • Enter parameters:


Transformation OFF
9. Result • Programming graphic

• ShopMill program representation

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


8-282 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Examples
8 8.5 Example 5: Slot side compensation 8

8.5 Example 5: Slot side compensation

A slot with parallel slot sides is milled in a pipe. In this instance, it is


not the slot contour which is programmed, but the imaginary center-
point path of a bolt inserted in the slot.

50

x
35 o
12

45 o

25 15
15 100

o
35

50

Preconditions • There is a rotary axis, e.g. axis A, and the transformation is


configured via machine data.
• The reference points on the cylinder are predefined. Program the
reference points X0, Y0, Z0 and the required zero offset, for
example, in "Machine Manual", "Workpiece zero" and "Edge".

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 8-283
Examples 08.00
8 8.5 Example 5: Slot side compensation 8
The zero offset calculated from these is entered in the zero offset
list.

Program

1. Program header • The blank dimensions correspond to the developed cylinder


peripheral surface.
X0 0 abs Y0 0 abs Z0 25 abs
X1 –130 abs Y1 157.08 abs Z1 22 abs
RP 50 SC 1
Note: Y1 is calculated according to equation: Y1 = ∅ • π
In this case: Diameter 50 multiplied by 3.14...

• Select softkey

2. Activate the zero offset in Select zero offset for cylinder surface transformation (e.g. offset the
the program zero point on the center point of the cylinder end face).
Misc. Transfor- Move zero
• Select via softkeys mations > point >

• Select the required zero offset and then select softkey .

3. Position the Y axis Position the tool in the Y axis over the center of the cylinder since the
Y axis is not traversed after cylinder transformation is selected.
Straight l. Straight
• Select via softkeys Circle

• Enter parameters:
X 10abs Y 0abs Z 40abs
F *rapid traverse*mm/min radius compensation OFF

4. Activate cylinder peripheral Misc. Transfor- Cylinder


surface transformation • Select via softkeys mations > surface >

• Enter parameters:
Transformation On
∅ 50
Slot side comp. On
D 6
Note: D is the distance from the imaginary center-point path to the
slot wall.

5. Activate the zero offset in Define the zero offset for the machining operation on the developed
the program cylinder surface (shift zero point to the zero point on the workpiece
drawing).
Misc. Transfor- Move zero
• Select via softkeys mations > point >

• Select the required zero offset and then select softkey .

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


8-284 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Examples
8 8.5 Example 5: Slot side compensation 8
6. Enter contour with contour Contour New
calculator • Select via softkeys milling contour >

• Enter a contour name (in this case: cylinder) and confirm

• Fill in the contour start screen form


Tool axis Z
Cylinder surface yes
∅ 50 X –25 abs Yα 0 abs
Note:Delete Y value, then enter Yα value (in this case 0°).

• Enter the following contour elements and confirm each with softkey

1. X –44 abs

2. X –25 abs
All
3. parameters Yα –35 abs I 0 inc
Select Accept
dialog (α2 tang.) dialog β2 180°

4. X –94 abs

5.
6. X –6 abs Yα 0 abs α1 45°

7. X –25 abs

• Accept contour by selecting softkey .

7. Path milling Contour Path


• Select via softkeys milling milling

• Enter parameters
T CUTTER_8 F 0.2 mm/tooth S 5000 rev/min

Radius compensation Machining


Z0 25 abs Z1 3 inc DZ 2
UZ 0 UXY 0

Approach Quadrant
R1 1
FZ 0.1 mm/tooth

Retract Quadrant
R2 1
Liftoff mode to return plane

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 8-285
Examples 08.00
8 8.5 Example 5: Slot side compensation 8
8. Deactivate cylinder Misc. Transfor- Cylinder
peripheral surface • Select via softkeys mations > surface >

transformation • Enter parameters:


Transformation OFF

9. Result • Programming graphic

• ShopMill program representation

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


8-286 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Examples
8 8.6 Example 6: Swiveling 8

8.6 Example 6: Swiveling

25 25

25

25
10

10
45°
20

20
50
R2 R2
10 in
10 in depth 45°
depth

Front view View of left-hand side

50
25
25
10

20

10 in
50

depth R2
45°
Z
Y X

Plan view
A 14
.4 34

17.678
10.206

10 in
depth
54.736°
90°
20.413
5
R

View A

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 8-287
Examples 08.00
8 8.6 Example 6: Swiveling 8

In this example, the machining plane is swiveled several times.

Program example 4

1. Program header • Define a blank:


X0 0 abs Y0 0 abs Z0 0 abs
X1 –50abs Y1 –50abs Z1 –50abs

• Select softkey

2. Rectangular pocket Milling Pocket Rectang.


• Select via softkeys > pocket

• Example of technological data:


T CUTTER_4 D 1 F 0.1 mm/tooth V 200 m/min

• Set the following parameters:

Position of Center
reference point
Machining type Roughing
Position type Single position
X0 –25 abs
Y0 –25 abs
Z0 0 abs
W 10
L 20
R 2
α0 –45°
Z1 5 inc
DXY 3 mm
DZ 2.5
UXY 0 mm
UZ 0
Insertion Center
FZ 0.05mm/tooth
Stock removal Complete mach.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


8-288 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Examples
8 8.6 Example 6: Swiveling 8
3. Swiveling Misc. Transfor- Swiveling
• Select via softkeys mations > >

• Example of technological data:


T CUTTER_4 D 1
• Set the following parameters:
Transformation New
X0 0
Y0 –50
Z0 0
Swiveling Axial
X 90°
Y 0
Z 0
X1 0
Y1 0
Z1 0
Direction –


4. Rectangular pocket Milling Pocket Rectang.
• Select via softkeys > pocket

• Example of technological data:


T CUTTER_4 D 1 F 0.1 mm/tooth V 200 m/min

• Set the following parameters:

Position of Center
reference point
Machining type Roughing
Position type Single position
X0 –25 abs
Y0 –25 abs
Z0 0 abs
W 10
L 20
R 2
α0 45°
Z1 5 inc
DXY 3 mm
DZ 2.5
UXY 0 mm
UZ 0
Insertion Center
FZ 0.05mm/tooth
Stock removal Complete mach.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 8-289
Examples 08.00
8 8.6 Example 6: Swiveling 8
5. Swiveling Misc. Transfor- Swiveling
• Select via softkeys mations >

• Example of technological data:


T CUTTER_4 D 1
• Set the following parameters:
Transformation New
X0 –50
Y0 –50
Z0 0
Swiveling Axial
Z –90°
X 90°
Y 0
X1 0
Y1 0
Z1 0
Direction –


6. Rectangular pocket Milling Pocket Rectang.
• Select via softkeys > pocket

• Example of technological data:


T CUTTER_4 D 1 F 0.1 mm/tooth V 200 m/min

• Set the following parameters:

Position of Center
reference point
Machining type Roughing
Position type Single position
X0 –25 abs
Y0 –25 abs
Z0 0 abs
W 10
L 20
R 2
α0 –45°
Z1 5 inc
DXY 3 mm
DZ 2.5
UXY 0 mm
UZ 0
Insertion Center
FZ 0.05mm/tooth
Stock removal Complete mach.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


8-290 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Examples
8 8.6 Example 6: Swiveling 8
7. Setting Misc. Settings
• Select via softkeys
• Define a blank:
X0 –17.678 abs Y0 10.206 abs Z0 0 abs
X1 17.678 abs Y1 –20.413 abs Z1 –10 abs

• Select softkey


8. Swiveling Misc. Transfor- Swiveling
• Select via softkeys mations >

• Example of technological data:


T FACING TOOL D 1

• Set the following parameters:

Transformation New
X0 –50
Y0 –50
Z0 –25
Swiveling Axial
Z –45°
X 54.736°
Y 0
X1 0
Y1 20.413
Z1 0
Direction –


9. Face milling Milling Face
• Select via softkeys milling > and choose a machining
strategy
• Example of technological data:
T FACING TOOL D 1 F 0.1 mm/tooth V 200 m/min

• Set the following parameters:

Machining type Roughing


X0 –17.678 abs
Y0 –20.413 abs
Z0 14.434 abs
X1 17.678 abs
Y1 10.206 abs
Z1 0 abs
DXY 80 %
DZ 2.5
UZ 0

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 8-291
Examples 08.00
8 8.6 Example 6: Swiveling 8
10. Drilling Drilling Drilling Drilling
• Select via softkeys Reaming

• Example of technological data:


T DRILL_3 D 1 F 0.1 mm/rev V 2000 rev/min

• Set the following parameters:

Shank/tip Shank
Z1 5 inc
DT 0s


11. Position pattern Drilling Positions
• Select via softkeys >

• Set the following parameters:


Full/pitch circle Full circle
Z0 0 abs
X0 0 abs
Y0 0 abs
α0 –90°
R 5
N 3
Positioning Linear


12. Swiveling Misc. Transfor- Swiveling
• Select via softkeys mations > >

• Example of technological data:


T 0 D 1
• Set the following parameters:

Transformation New
X0 0
Y0 0
Z0 0
Swiveling Axial
X 0
Y 0
Z 0
X1 0
Y1 0
Z1 0
Direction –

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


8-292 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Examples
8 8.6 Example 6: Swiveling 8
Result • ShopMill program representation

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition 8-293
Examples 08.00
8 8.6 Example 6: Swiveling 8

Notes

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


8-294 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Appendix
A A
Appendix

A Abbreviations .......................................................................................................... A-296

B Terms...................................................................................................................... A-299

C References ............................................................................................................. A-307

D Index ....................................................................................................................... A-319

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition A-295
Appendix 08.00
A Abbreviations A

A Abbreviations

ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange

CNC Computerized Numerical Control

CRC Cutter Radius Compensation

DIN Deutsche Industrie Norm (German Industry Standard)

DIO Data Input/Output: Data transfer display

DOS Disk Operating System

DRF Differential Resolver Function

FDD Feed Drive

FST Feed Stop

HW Hardware

INC Increment

INI Initializing Data

IPO Interpolator

K1 .. K4 Channels 1 to 4

LF Line Feed

MCP Machine Control Panel

MCS Machine Coordinate System

MD Machine Data

MMC Man Machine Communication: User interface on numerical control


systems for operator control, programming and simulation

NC Numerical Control

NCK Numerical Control Kernel (with block preparation, traversing range,


etc.)

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


A-296 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Appendix
A Abbreviations A
OI Operator Interface

PC Personal Computer

PLC Programmable Logic Controller

POS Positioning function

REF Reference point approach function

REPOS Reposition function

SBL Single Block

SK Softkey

SKP Skip block

SM Stepper Motor

SW Software

TC Tool Change

TLC Tool Length Compensation

TNRC Tool Nose Radius Compensation

TO Tool Offset

TRC Tool Radius Compensation

UP Subroutine

V.24 Serial Interface (Definition of interchange lines between DTE and


DCE)

WCS Workpiece Coordinate System

ZO Zero offset

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition A-297
Appendix 08.00
A Abbreviations A

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


A-298 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Appendix
A Terms A

B Terms

Important terms are listed below in alphabetical order, accompanied


by explanations. Cross-references to other entries in this glossary are
indicated by the symbol ->.

A
Absolute dimension A destination for an axis movement is defined by a dimension that
refers to the origin of the currently active coordinate system. See also
-> incremental dimension.

Access rights CNC program modules and data are protected by a 7-level system of
access restrictions:
• Three password levels for system manufacturer, machine-tool
manufacturer and user, and
• four keyswitch settings which can be evaluated via the PLC.

Alarms All -> messages and alarms are displayed on the control panel in
plain-text form and accompanied by date and time and the symbol for
the appropriate deletion criterion. Alarms and messages are displayed
separately.

Archiving Exporting files and/or directories to an external storage device.

Auto Operating mode of ShopMill in which a program is selected and then


processed without interruption.

Auxiliary functions Auxiliary functions can be used to pass -> parameters to the -> PLC in
-> programs, triggering reactions there which are defined by the
machine manufacturer.

Axes CNC axes are categorized by their functional scope as follows:


• Axes: Interpolative path axes
• Auxiliary axes: Non-interpolative infeed and positioning axes with
axis-specific feedrates. Auxiliary axes do not participate in
workpiece machining as such and include tool feeders, tool
magazines, etc.

B
Blank The unmachined workpiece.

Block Part of a -> program.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition A-299
Appendix 08.00
A Terms A
C
Channel A channel can execute a -> program independently of other channels.
A channel has exclusive control over the axes and spindles assigned
to it. Part program sequences on different channels can be
coordinated by -> synchronization.

CNC -> NC

Contour Outline of a -> workpiece

Contour monitoring The following error is monitored within a definable tolerance bandwidth
as a measure of contour precision. The following error might violate
permissible limits, for example, on account of drive overload. In this
case, an alarm is output and the axes are stopped.

Coordinate system See -> machine coordinate system, -> workpiece coordinate system.

Cycle Protected subroutine for execution of a recurring machining process


on the -> workpiece.

D
Dimensions in metric In the machining program, position and lead/pitch values can be
and inch systems entered in inches. The control is set to a base system irrespective of
the programmable unit of measure (G70/G71).

DRF Differential Resolver Function An NC function which generates an


incremental zero offset in AUTOMATIC mode in conjunction with an
electronic handwheel.

E
Editor The editor allows programs/texts/program blocks to be created,
modified, extended, chained and inserted.

Electronic handwheel Electronic handwheels are used to traverse selected axes


simultaneously under manual control. The handwheel clicks are
analyzed by the increment analyzer.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


A-300 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Appendix
A Terms A
F
Feedrate override The current feedrate setting entered via the control panel or by the
PLC is overlaid on the programmed feedrate (0-200 %). The feedrate
can also be corrected by a programmable percentage factor (1-200 %)
in the machining program.

Finished-part contour Contour of the finished workpiece. See also -> Blank.

Fixed-point approach Machine tools can execute defined approaches to fixed points such as
tool-change points, loading points, pallet-change points, etc. The
coordinates of these points are stored in the control. The control
traverses the axes in question in -> rapid traverse if possible.

G
Geometry Description of a -> workpiece in the -> workpiece coordinate system.

Geometry axis Geometry axes are used to describe a 2- or 3-dimensional area in the
workpiece coordinate system.

I
I/O module I/O modules establish the link between the CPU and the process.
I/O modules are:
• -> Digital input/output modules
• -> Analog input/output modules
• -> Simulator modules

Inch system of System of measurement in which distances are measured in inches


measurement and fractions of inches.

Incremental dimensions A destination for axis traverse is defined by a distance to be covered


and a direction referenced to a point already reached. See also
-> absolute dimension. Length of the traversing path given by the
number of increments. The number of increments can be stored as ->
setting data or selected using the corresponding keys 10, 100, 10 000.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition A-301
Appendix 08.00
A Terms A
M
Machine axes Axes which physically exist in the machine tool.

Machine Control Panel An operator panel on a machine tool with operating elements such as
keys, rotary switches, etc. and simple indicators such as LEDs. It is
used for direct control of the machine tool via the PLC.

Machine coordinate Coordinate system that refers to the axes of the machine tool.
system

Machine fixed point A point uniquely defined by the machine tool, for example, the
reference point.

Machine zero A fixed point on the machine tool which can be referenced by all
derived measuring systems.

Machining channel A channel structure provides a means of reducing non-productive


times by paralleling operations. For example, a loader can execute its
movements during a machining operation. In this respect, a channel
ranks as an autonomous CNC complete with decoding, block
preparation and interpolation.

Manual Operating mode of the ShopMill application (setup mode):


The machine can be set up in Manual mode. Individual axes and
spindles can be traversed in JOG via the Direction keys. Other
functions in the Manual operating mode are -> reference point
approach, -> Repos and -> basic offset.

Messages All messages programmed in the program and -> alarms detected by
the system are displayed on the control panel in plain-text form with
date and time and the appropriate symbol for the deletion criterion.
Alarms and messages are displayed separately.

Mirroring Mirroring exchanges the leading signs of the coordinate values of a


contour in relation to an axis. Mirroring can be performed
simultaneously in relation to several axes.

N
NC Numerical Control NC control incorporates all the components of the
machine tool control system: -> NCK, -> PLC, -> MMC, -> COM.

NCK Numeric Control Kernel: Component of the NC control which executes


-> programs and essentially coordinates the movements on the
machine.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


A-302 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Appendix
A Terms A
O
Offset memory Data area in the control used to store the tool offset data.

Operator Interface The operator interface (OI) is the display medium of a CNC in the form
of a screen. It has eight horizontal and eight vertical softkeys.

Override Manual or programmable control feature which enables the operator to


overlay programmed feedrates or speeds to adapt them to a specific
workpiece or material.

P
PLC Programmable Logic Controller. A component of the -> NC control:
A control which can be programmed to control the logic on a machine
tool.

Polar coordinates A coordinate system which defines the position of a point on a plane in
terms of its distance from the origin and the angle formed by the
radius vector with a defined axis.

Power On Disconnection and reconnection of control system power supply.

Program A sequence of instructions to the NC control which combine to


produce a specific -> workpiece by performing machining operations
on a -> blank.

R
Rapid traverse Highest speed of an axis, used, for example, to bring the tool from an
idle position to the -> workpiece contour or retract it from the
workpiece contour.

Reference point A point on the machine tool to which the measurement system of
the -> machine axes refers.

Reference point If the system of position measuring employed is not based on


approach absolute-value encoders, the control must perform a reference point
approach in order to ensure that the measured values supplied by the
measuring system coincide with the machine coordinate values.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition A-303
Appendix 08.00
A Terms A
REPOS 1. Reapproach to contour, triggered by operator
The Repos function provides a means of returning the tool to the
interrupt position with the aid of the direction keys.

2. Program-driven return to contour


A number of repositioning strategies driven by program commands
are available: Reposition at interrupt point, reposition at start of
block, reposition at end of block, reposition at a point on the path
between beginning of block and interruption.

Rotation Component of a programmable offset which defines a rotation of the


coordinate system through a specific angle.

S
Scale Component of a -> frame which causes axis-specific alterations in the
scale.

Softkey A key whose name appears on an area of the screen. The choice of
softkeys displayed is adapted dynamically to the operating situation.
Freely assignable function keys (softkeys) are assigned to functions
defined in the software.

Subroutine Sequence of statements in a -> program that can be called repeatedly


with differing initial parameters. Subroutines are called from the main
program. Every subroutine can be protected against unauthorized
readout and display. -> Cycles are a type of subroutine.

T
Tool Component used to machine workpieces, e.g. milling tool, drill,...

Tool radius Direct programming of a -> workpiece contour requires the control to
compensation be able to travel a path equidistant to the programmed contour, taking
the radius of the tool used into account.

W
Working space Three-dimensional zone into which the tool tip can be moved on
account of the physical design of the machine tool.
See also -> protection zone.

Workpiece Part to be produced/machined by the machine tool.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


A-304 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Appendix
A Terms A
Workpiece coordinate The datum of the workpiece coordinate system is the -> workpiece
system zero. If the workpiece coordinate system is used for programming,
dimensions and directions are referenced to this system.

Workpiece zero The workpiece zero is the datum for the -> workpiece coordinate
system. It is defined by distances from the machine zero.

Z
Zero offset Specification of a new reference point for a coordinate system by
means of a reference to an existing zero and a programmable offset.
1. Settable
Four independent zero offsets can be selected per CNC axis.
2. External
All offsets which define the position of the workpiece zero can be
overlaid with an external zero offset
- defined by handwheel (DRF offset) or
- defined by the PLC.
3. Programmable
Zero offsets can be programmed for all path and positioning axes
by means of programmable zero offsets NPV1...4.

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition A-305
Appendix 08.00
A Terms A

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


A-306 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Appendix
A References A

C References
General Documentation

/BU/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC


Ordering Information
Catalog NC 60.1
Order No.: E86060-K4460-A101-A8-7600

/ST7/ SIMATIC
SIMATIC S7 Programmable Logic Controllers
Catalog ST 70
Order No.: E86 060-K4670-A111-A3

/W/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC


Brochure

/Z/ SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE


Accessories and Equipment for Special-Purpose Machines
Catalog NC Z
Order No.: E86060-K4490-A001-A7-7600

Electronic Documentation

/CD6/ The SINUMERIK System (10.00 Edition)


DOC ON CD
(with all SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC and SIMODRIVE 611D publications)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6CA00-0BG2

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition A-307
Appendix 08.00
A References A
User Documentation

/AUE/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC


AutoTurn Graphic Programming System (07.99 Edition)
Part 2: Setup
Order No.: 6FC5 298-4AA50-0BP1

/AUK/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC


Short Guide AutoTurn Operation (07.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-4AA30-0BP1

/AUP/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC


AutoTurn Graphic Programming System (07.99 Edition)
Part 1: Programming
Order No.: 6FC5 298-4AA40-0BP1

/BA/ SINUMERIK 840D/810Di/FM-NC


Operator’s Guide (10.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AA00-0BP0
• Operator’s Guide
• Operator’s Guide with HMI Advanced

/BAE/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC


Operator’s Guide Unit Operator Panel (04.96 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-3AA60-0BP1

/BAH/ SINUMERIK 840D/810 D


Operator’s Guide HAT 6 (HPU new) (06.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-0AD60-0BPO

/BAK/ SINUMERIK 840D/810Di/FM-NC


Short Operating Guide (10.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AA10-0BP0

/BAM/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D


Operator’s Guide ManualTurn (02.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AD00-0BP0

/KAM/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D


Short Guide ManualTurn (12.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-2AD40-0BP0

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


A-308 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Appendix
A References A
/BAS/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D
Operator’s Guide ShopMill (08.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AD10-0BP0

/KAS/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D


Short Guide ShopMill (01.98 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-2AD30-0BP0

/BAP/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D


Operator’s Guide Handheld Programming Unit (04.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AD20-0BP0

/BNM/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC


User’s Guide Measuring Cycles (06.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AA70-0BP2

/DA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC


Diagnostics Guide (10.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AA20-0BP2

/PG/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC


Programming Guide Fundamentals (10.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AB00-0BP2

/PGA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC


Programming Guide Advanced (10.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AB10-0BP2

/PGK/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC


Short Guide Programming (10.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AB30-0BP0

/PGZ/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC


Programming Guide Cycles (10.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AB40-0BP2

/PI/ PCIN 4.4


Software for Data Transfer to/from MMC Module
Order No.: 6FX2 060-4AA00-4XB0 (German, English, French)
Order from: WK Fürth

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition A-309
Appendix 08.00
A References A
Manufacturer/Service Documentation
a) Lists

/LIS/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC


SIMODRIVE 611D
Lists (10.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AB70-0BP2

b) Hardware

/BH/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC


Operator Components Manual (HW) (10.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP2

/BHA/ SIMODRIVE Sensor


Absolute Encoder with Profibus DP (02.99 Edition)
User’s Guide (HW)
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB10-0YP1

/EMV/ SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE


EMC Installation Guide (06.99 Edition)
Planning Guide (HW)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-0AD30-0BP1

/PHC/ SINUMERIK 810D


Manual Configuring (HW) (10.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-4AD10-0BP2

/PHD/ SINUMERIK 840D


NCU 571.2-573.2 Manual (HW) (10.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC10-0BP2

/PHF/ SINUMERIK FM-NC


NCU 570 Manual (HW) (04.96 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-3AC00-0BP0

/PMH/ SIMODRIVE Sensor


Measuring System for Main Spindle Drives
Planning/Installation Guide, SIMAG-H (HW) (05.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB30-0BP0

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


A-310 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Appendix
A References A
c) Software

/FB/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC


Description of Functions Basic Machine (Part 1) (10.00 Edition)
(the various sections are listed below)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC20-0BP2

A2 Various Interface Signals


A3 Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones
B1 Continuous Path Mode, Exact Stop and Look Ahead
B2 Acceleration
D1 Diagnostic Tools
D2 Interactive Programming
F1 Travel to Fixed Stop
G2 Velocities, Setpoint/Actual Value Systems, Closed-Loop
Control
H2 Output of Auxiliary Functions to PLC
K1 Mode Group, Channels, Program Operation Mode
K2 Coordinate Systems, Axis Types, Axis Configurations,
Actual-Value System for Workpiece, External Zero Offset
K4 Communication
N2 EMERGENCY STOP
P1 Transverse Axes
P3 Basic PLC Program
R1 Reference Point Approach
S1 Spindles
V1 Feeds
W1 Tool Compensation

/FB/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (CCU2)/FM-NC (10.00 Edition)


Description of Functions, Extended Functions (Part 2)
including FM-NC: Turning, Stepping Motor
(the various sections are listed below)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC30-0BP2

A4 Digital and Analog NCK I/Os


B3 Several Operator Panels and NCUs
B4 Operation via PC/PG
F3 Remote Diagnostics
H1 Jog with/without Handwheel
K3 Compensations
K5 Mode Groups, Channels, Axis Replacement
L1 FM-NC Local Bus
M1 Kinematic Transformation
M5 Measurements
N3 Software Cams, Position Switching Signals
N4 Punching and Nibbling
P2 Positioning Axes
P5 Oscillation

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition A-311
Appendix 08.00
A References A
R2 Rotary Axes
S3 Synchronous Spindles
S5 Synchronized Actions (up to and including SW 3)
S6 Stepper Motor Control
S7 Memory Configuration
T1 Indexing Axes
W3 Tool Change
W4 Grinding

/FB/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (CCU2)/FM-NC


Description of Functions, Special Functions (Part 3)(10.00 Edition)
(the various sections are listed below)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC80-0BP2

F2 3-Axis to 5-Axis Transformation


G1 Gantry Axes
G3 Cycle Times
K6 Contour Tunnel Monitoring
M3 Coupled Motion and Leading Value Coupling
S8 Constant Workpiece Speed for Centerless Grinding
T3 Tangential Control
V2 Preprocessing
W5 3D Tool Radius Compensation
TE1 Clearance Control
TE2 Analog Axis
TE3 Master-Slave for Drives
TE4 Transformation Package Handling
TE5 Setpoint Value Changearer
TE6 MCS Link

/FBA/ SIMODRIVE 611D/SINUMERIK 840D/810D


Description of Functions, Drive Functions (10.00 Edition)
(the various sections are listed below)
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA80-0BP6

DB1 Operational Messages/Alarm Reactions


DD1 Diagnostic Functions
DD2 Speed Control Loop
DE1 Extended Drive Functions
DF1 Enable Commands
DG1 Encoder Parameterization
DM1 Calculation of Motor/Power Section Parameters and
Controller Data
DS1 Current Control Loop
DÜ1 Monitors/Limitations

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


A-312 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Appendix
A References A
/FBAN/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 DIGITAL
Description of Functions
ANA-MODULE (02.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB80-0BP0

/FBD/ SINUMERIK 840D


Description of Functions Digitizing (07.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-4AC50-0AP0

DI1 Startup
DI2 Scanning with Tactile Sensors (scancad scan)
DI3 Scanning with Lasers (scancad laser)
DI4 Milling Program Generation (scancad mill)

/FBDN/ CAM-Integration DNC NT-2000


Description of Fonctions
System for NC Data Management and Data
Distribution (05.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE50-0BP0

/FBFA/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D


Description of Functions
ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK (10.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE10-0BP0

/FBHLA/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D digital


Description of Functions
HLA Module (08.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB60-0BP1

/FBMA/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D


Description of Functions ManualTurn (02.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AD50-0BP0

/FBO/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC


Description of Functions
Configuring of Operator Interface OP 030 (03.96 Edition)
(the various sections are listed below)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-3AC40-0BP0

BA Operator’s Guide
EU Development Environment (Configuring Package)
PS Online only: Configuring Syntax (Configuring Package)
PSE Introduction to Configuring of Operator Interface
IK Screen Kit: Software Update and Configuration

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition A-313
Appendix 08.00
A References A
/FBP/ SINUMERIK 840D
Description of Functions C-PLC Programming (03.96 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-3AB60-0BP0

/FBR/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D


Description of Functions
SINCOM Computer Link (02.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AD60-0BP0

NFL Host Computer Interface


NPL PLC/NCK Interface

/FBSI/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE


Description of Functions
SINUMERIK Safety Integrated (05.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AB80-0BP1

/FBSP/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D


Description of Functions ShopMill (08.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AD80-0BP1

/FBST/ SIMATIC (11.98 Edition)


FM STEPDRIVE/SIMOSTEP
Description of Functions
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA70-0YP3

/FBSY/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D(CCU2)


Description of Functions Synchronized Actions (10.00 Edition)
for Wood, Glass, Ceramics and Presses
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AD40-0BP0

/FBTD/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D


Description of Functions
Tool Information SINTDI with Online Help (04.99 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AE00-0BP0

/FBU/ SIMODRIVE 611 universal


Description of Functions (05.00 Edition)
Closed-Loop Control Component for Speed Control
and Positioning
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB20-0BP3

/FBW/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D


Description of Functions Tool Management (07.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AC60-0BP2

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


A-314 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Appendix
A References A
/HBI/ SINUMERIK 840Di
Manual (06.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AE50-0BP0

/IK/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC


Screen Kit MMC 100/Unit Operator Panel (06.96 Edition)
Description of Functions: Software Update and Configuration
Order No.: 6FC5 297-3EA10-0BP1

/KBU/ SIMODRIVE 611 universal


Short Description (05.00 Edition)
Closed-Loop Control Component for Speed Control
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB40-0BP3

/PLJM/ SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide Linear Motors (05.00 Edition)
(on request)
ALL General Information about Linear Motors
1FN1 1FN3 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor
CON Connections
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB70-0AP1

/PJM/ SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide Motors
AC Motors for Feed and (01.98 Edition)
Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA20-0BP3

/PJMS/ SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide Synchronous Integrated Motor 1FE1
AC Motors for Main Spindle Drives (03.00 Edition)
Order No.: (on request)

/PJU/ SIMODRIVE 611-A/611-D


Planning Guide Inverters (08.98 Edition)
Transistor PWM Inverters for AC Feed Drives and
AC Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA00-0BP4

/POS1/ SIMODRIVE POSMO A (02.00 Edition)


User Guide
Decentralized Positioning Motor on PROFIBUS DP
Order No.: 6SN2 197-0AA00-0BP1

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition A-315
Appendix 08.00
A References A
/POS2/ SIMODRIVE POSMO A (12.98 Edition)
Installation Instructions (enclosed with POSMO A)
Order No.: 462 008 0815 00

/POS3/ SIMODRIVE POSMO SI/CD/CA (09.00 Edition)


Decentralized Servodrive Technology, Operator Manual
Order No.: 6SN2 197-0AA20-0BP0
(available soon)

/S7H/ SIMATIC S7-300


Manual: Assembly, CPU Data (HW) (10.98 Edition)
Reference Manual: Module Data
Order No.: 6ES7 398-8AA03-8AA0

/S7HT/ SIMATIC S7-300


Manual: STEP 7, Basic Information, V. 3.1 (03.97 Edition)
Order No.: 6ES7 810-4CA02-8AA0

/S7HR/ SIMATIC S7-300


Manual: STEP 7, Reference Manuals, V. 3.1 (03.97 Edition)
Order No.: 6ES7 810-4CA02-8AR0

/S7S/ SIMATIC S7-300


FM 353 Step Drive Positioning Module (04.97 Edition)
Order in conjunction with Configuring Package

/S7L/ SIMATIC S7-300


FM 354 Servo Drive Positioning Module (04.97 Edition)
Order in conjunction with Configuring Package

/S7M/ SIMATIC S7-300


FM 357 Multi-Axis Module for Servo and (10.99 Edition)
Stepper Drives
Order in conjunction with Configuring Package

/SHM/ SIMODRIVE 611


Manual (01.98 Edition)
Single-Axis Positioning for MCU 172A
Order No.: 6SN 1197-4MA00-0BP0

/SP/ SIMODRIVE 611-A/611-D


SimoPro 3.1
Program for Configuring Machine-Tool Drives
Order No.: 6SC6 111-6PC00-0AA❏
Order from: WK Fürth

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


A-316 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Appendix
A References A
d) Installation and start-up

/IAA/ SIMODRIVE 611A


Installation and Start-Up Guide (04.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6SN 1197-0AA60-0BP5

/IAC/ SINUMERIK 810D


Installation and Start-Up Guide (10.00 Edition)
(incl. description of SIMODRIVE 611D
start-up software)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-4AD20-0BP0

/IAD/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D


Installation and Start-Up Guide (10.00 Edition)
(incl. description of SIMODRIVE 611D
start-up software)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AB10-0BP0

/IAF/ SINUMERIK FM-NC


Installation and Start-Up Guide (04.96 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-3AB00-0BP0

/IAM/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D


MMC Installation and Start-up Guide (10.00 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE20-0BP0

IM1 Start-up functions for the MMC


IM3 Start-up functions for the MMC 103
IM4 Start-up HMI Advanced (PCU 50)
HE1 Editor help
BE1 Supplement operator interface

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition A-317
Appendix 08.00
A References A
Notes

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


A-318 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Appendix
A Index A

D Index

3 Chaining 3-100
3D probe 2-50 Chamfer 3-113
3D representation 5-218 Change the tool type 2-87
3D tools 2-77 Change view 5-218
3-plane view 5-216 Change viewport 5-218
A Chip breaking 3-143
Absolute dimension 1-30 Circle 3-117
Absolute dimensioning 3-97 Polar 3-138
Access authorization 1-24 With known center point 3-133
Additional commands 3-113 With known radius 3-134
Alarms Circular pocket 3-167, 8-272
Cycles 7-250 Circular spigot 8-278
ShopMill 7-257 Circular spigots 3-171
ShopMill 7-255 Circumferential slot 8-270
Allowance 3-110 Circumferential slot 3-175
Alphanumeric keypad 1-17 CNC operation 2-94
Alternat. 1-31, 3-106 Comment 3-200
Angle for tapered milling tools 2-77 Complete machining 3-106
Annular slot 3-175 Conditional stop 2-68
Approach a cycle 3-107 Contour
Approach mode 3-121 Close 3-116
Approach strategy 3-121 New 3-112
Area switchover key 1-17 Contour element 3-116
ASCII editor 4-204 Contour milling 3-111
Automatic mode 2-62 Coolant 2-83
Auxiliary functions 2-63 Coordinate system
Axes 3-97 Rectangular 1-29
Axis Corner point 3-104
Position 2-59 Correction/cursor keypad 1-17
B Create tool wear data 2-84
Base offset 2-90 Cutter radius compensation 3-98
Basic angle of rotation 3-154 Cutting plane 5-219
Basic offset 2-47 Cutting rate 3-98, 3-110
Blank 3-104 Cylinder peripheral surface transformation
Blank dimensions 5-214 3-115, 3-191
Block search 2-66 D
Boring 3-145 D1 3-110
C D2 3-110
Calibrate the workpiece probe 2-54 Deep-hole drilling 3-143
Center 8-270 Define a blank 3-199
Centering 3-124 Define search target 2-66
Centering 3-141 Define the starting point 3-112
Center-point path 3-121 Dialog selection 3-115

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition A-319
Appendix 08.00
A Index A
Disable magazine location 2-86 Helix 3-135
DR 3-110 Help display 3-101
DRF offset 2-91 I
Drilling 3-140, 3-142 Inc 1-21
Dry run 2-68 Inch/metric 3-97
Dry run feedrate 2-69 Inch/metric switchover 1-33
Duplo number 2-75 Inch/mm 2-46
E Increment 2-40
Edge probe 2-48, 2-49 Increment size 1-21
Emergency Stop 1-20 Increment value 1-21
Equidistant path 2-82 Incremental dimension 1-31
Example Incremental dimensioning 3-97
Cylinder peripheral surface transformation Information key 3-102
8-280 Insertion 3-165
Drilling 3-159 Inside contour 3-113
Face milling 3-163 Inside thread 3-147
Free contour programming 3-118 ISO dialect 2-75
Polar coordinates 3-139 ISO dialects 4-211
Position pattern for milling 3-178 K
Rectangular pocket 3-166 Keyswitch 1-24
Slot side compensation 8-283 L
Thread cutting 3-149 Length allowance 2-84
Examples 8-266, 8-274, 8-277 Line 3-131
Execute 2-62 Polar 3-137
F Location assignment 2-76
Face milling 2-60, 3-161 Location number 2-75
Feed control 1-22 Longitudinal slot 3-173
Feed Start 1-22 LUD 4-208
Feed Stop 1-22 M
Feedrate 3-99, 3-106 M functions 2-63
Feedrate override 1-22 Machine control panel 1-20
Finish 3-129 Machine coordinate system 1-34
Finish cutting 2-60 Machine functions 1-21
Finishing 3-106 Machine zero 2-90
Fixed location 2-85 Machining direction 3-105
Free contour programming 3-111, 3-112 Machining feedrate 3-99
Function keys 1-19 Machining plan 3-101
G Machining plane 2-45
G code 3-113 Magazine 2-86
G code 3-200 Magazine list 2-86
G code program 4-204 Manual mode 2-40, 2-59
G functions 2-63 Manual mode 2-40
Gear stage 2-45 Manual tools 2-79
Graphics interface 1-28 Marker 3-183
Graphics monitor 1-17 Marking 8-274
GUD 4-208 MCS 1-22
H MCS/WCS 1-34
H functions 2-63 MDA mode 2-61
H number 2-75, 4-211 Measurements 3-180

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


A-320 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Appendix
A Index A
Messages Positioning 3-150
Cycles 7-254 Positioning motions 3-131
Metric/inch 3-97 Positions 8-271
Metric/inch switchover 1-33 Power OFF 2-37
Milling 3-161 Power ON 2-37
Mini handheld unit 1-26 Program
Mirroring 8-275 Abort 2-64
Mirroring 3-190 Correct 2-73
mm/inch 2-46 Execute a trial run 2-72
N Interrupt 2-65
NC Start 1-25 Select for execution 2-63
NC Stop 1-25 Start 2-64
No. of loadings 2-85 Stop 2-64
Number of teeth 2-83 Program block 3-100
O Change 3-108
Obstacle 3-157, 8-271 Copy 3-108
Offset 8-275 Delete 3-108
Programmable 2-90 Find 3-109
Offset value 3-110 Move 3-108
Offset values 2-82 New 3-106
OP 031 1-17 Paste 3-108
OP 032S 1-18 Paste 3-108
OP031 slimline operator panel 1-17 Repeat 3-183
OP032S slimline operator panel 1-18 Program blocks
Operating modes 1-21 Mark 3-108
Operator components 1-17 Program control 1-25, 2-68
Outside contour 3-113 Program header 3-100, 3-103
Outside thread 3-147 Program name 3-103
P Program structure 3-100
Parameters 3-115 Programming graphic 3-101, 3-114
Password 1-24 PUD 4-208
Path milling 3-111, 3-120 Punched tape/ISO format 4-211
Plan view 5-215 R
Plane designations 1-29 R parameters 4-207
Pocket calculator 1-32 Radii allowance 2-84
Pocket with islands 3-111, 3-126, 3-129 Radius 3-113
Polar coordinates 1-30, 3-136 Rapid traverse 2-59
Pole 3-136 Rapid traverse override 1-22
Position Reaming 3-142
Freely programmable 3-151 Recall 1-17
Position Rectangular pocket 3-164, 8-269
Repeat 3-158 Rectangular spigots 3-169
Position pattern Ref 1-21
Full circle 3-154 Reference point approach 2-38
Line 3-152 Remote diagnosis 2-94
Matrix 3-153 Remove residual material 3-111
Milling 3-177 Repeat 3-183
Pitch circle 3-156 Repetition 8-276
Position value 2-47 Replacement tool 2-79

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition A-321
Appendix 08.00
A Index A
Repos 1-21, 2-65 Spindle control 1-23
Reposition tool on contour 2-65 Spindle direction of rotation 2-83
Reset 1-25 Spindle override 1-23
Residual material 3-127 Spindle speed 2-44, 3-110
Retract tool from contour 2-65 Spindle speed 3-98
Retraction mode 3-121 Spindle Start 1-23
Retraction strategy 3-121 Spindle Stop 1-23
Retraction withposition patterns 3-105 Status display 2-70
Return plane 2-59, 3-104, 3-184 Stock removal 3-143
Right-hand rule 1-29 Straight line 3-117
Rotation 3-188 Subroutine 3-183
Rough cut 3-126 Swiveling 3-194, 8-289
Rough cutting 2-60 T
Rough drilling 3-123 T, F, S 2-63
Rough-drill 3-111 Tangent 3-115
Roughing 3-106 Tapping 3-146
Rounding radius 2-77 Thread cutting 3-147
S Three-dimensional representation 5-218
S 3-110 Tool
Safety clearance 2-59, 3-104, 3-184 Accept from tool list 2-56
Scale 2-92 Change 2-41
Scaling 3-189 create new 2-77
Scratching 2-56 Delete 2-87
Select the alarm overview 7-256 Disable 2-85
Select the message overview 7-256 Load 2-87
Sensor probe 2-48 Load in magazine 2-43
Setup feedrate 2-40 load new 2-42
Setup, manual 2-50 Measure 2-56, 2-57
Setup, manual 2-49 Measure 3-182
ShopMill 1-16, 2-94 Oversized 2-85
ShopMill program 3-97 Program 3-110
Simulation 4-206, 5-214 Program 3-97
Abort 5-215 Sort 2-89
Start 5-214 Unload 2-88
Simultaneous recording Tool axis 2-45
Before machining 2-70 Tool length compensation 2-81, 3-97
During machining 2-71 Tool life 2-85
Single block 1-25, 2-72 Tool list
Deselect 2-72 Select 2-76
Skip block 2-69 Tool list 2-74
Slot side compensation 3-191 Tool magazine 2-76
Solid machine 3-126 Tool monitoring 2-85
Sort block numbers 3-109 Tool name 2-79
Special function Tool offset 2-80
Tool 2-83 Tool offset block for edge 2-78
Special functions 2-45 Tool offsets 2-74
Spindle Tool probe 2-57
Position 2-44 Calibrate 2-58
Start/stop 2-44 Tool radius compensation 2-81, 3-98

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


A-322 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
08.00 Appendix
A Index A
Tool status 2-86 WCS/MCS 1-34
Tool type 2-75 Workpiece
Tool wear list 2-76 Measure 3-180
Tool zero 2-90 Zero point 3-180
Tools 2-74 Workpiece
Total offset 2-91 Set up 2-48
Transition element 3-113 Workpiece coordinate system 1-34
Traverse at rapid rate 3-99 Z
Traverse axes 2-40 Zero offset 2-48
U Deselect 2-93
Unit of measurement 3-104 Display 2-91
Update view 5-219 Programmable 3-187
User data 4-208 Select 2-93
Define 4-208 Settable 2-90, 3-186
V Settable 2-93
V 3-110 Zero offset list 2-48
Variable Zero offsets 3-185
Global 4-208 Zero offsets 2-90
Local 4-208 Zoom 5-217
Program-global 4-208
W
WCS 1-22

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition A-323
Appendix 08.00
A Index A

Notes

 Siemens AG 2000. All rights reserved


A-324 SINUMERIK 840D/810D, ShopMill Operation/Programming (BAS) – 08.00 Edition
To Suggestions

SIEMENS AG
Corrections
A&D MC BMS for Publication/Manual:

P.O. Box 3180


SINUMERIK 840D/810D
D-91050 Erlangen
ShopMill
Federal Republic of Germany
(Tel. 0180 / 525 - 8008 [Hotline]
Fax ++49-9131/98-1145
User Documentation
email: motioncontrol.docu@erlf.siemens.de)
From Operation/Programming

Order No.: 6FC5298-5AD10-0BP1


Name Edition: 08.00
Company/Department
Should you come across any printing errors when
Address: reading this publication, please notify us on this sheet.
Suggestions for improvement are also welcome.

Telephone: /
Telefax: /

Suggestions and/or corrections

You might also like